SECTION 1 - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../toyota/2005-matrix.pdf · 2015-10-07 · ’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409) 8 2005 MATRIX from Sep. ’04 Prod. (OM12892U) Brake system

’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

1

2005 MATRIX from Sep. ’04 Prod. (OM12892U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1

Information Provided by:

’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

2


1. Side defroster outlets

2. Side vents

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Personal lights

6. Electric moon roof switches andpersonal light

7. Power door lock switches

8. Power window switches

9. Glove box

10. Portable ashtray

11. Cup holders

12. Power outlet (12 VDC)

13. Parking brake lever

14. Auxiliary boxes

15. Automatic transmission selector leveror manual transmission gear shift lever

16. Hood lock release lever

17. Window lock switch

Instrument panel overview�View A


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

3


1. Power rear view mirror control switches

2. Interior/instrument panel light controldial

3. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

4. Wiper and washer switches

5. Air conditioning controls

6. Rear window defogger switch

7. Emergency flasher switch

8. Clock

9. Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight/front passenger occupantclassification indicator light

10. Car audio

11. Auxiliary box or power outlet (115 VAC)

12. Power outlet (12 VDC) or cigarettelighter

13. Ignition switch

14. Cruise control switch

15. Tilt steering lock release lever

16. “TRAC OFF” (traction control systemoff) switch

17. Engine immobilizer system/Toyotavehicle intrusion protection systemindicator light

�View B (vehicles without navigation system)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

4


18. Tire pressure warning system resetswitch

19. Glass hatch opener switch


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

5


1. Power rear view mirror control switches

2. Interior/instrument panel light controldial

3. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

4. Wiper and washer switches

5. Air conditioning controls

6. Emergency flasher switch

7. Rear window defogger switch

8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight/front passenger occupantclassification indicator light

9. Navigation system

10. Auxiliary box or power outlet (115 VAC)

11. Power outlet (12 VDC) or cigarettelighter

12. Ignition switch

13. Cruise control switch

14. Tilt steering lock release lever

15. “TRAC OFF” (traction control systemoff) switch

16. Engine immobilizer system/Toyotavehicle intrusion protection systemindicator light

�View B (vehicles with navigation system)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

6


17. Tire pressure warning system resetswitch

18. Glass hatch opener switch


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

7


1. Tachometer

2. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Low fuel level warning light

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer, two trip meters and outsidetemperature display

Instrument cluster overview


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

8


Brake system warning light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1 Open door warning light∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1or

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light∗1, ∗3

or

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

or

Vehicle stability control system/traction controlsystem warning light∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

Front passenger occupant classification indicatorlight

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

9


∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 107 in Section 1−6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 132 inSection 1−7.

∗3: This symbol equipped only on vehicles sold in Canada.

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Overdrive−off indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Headlight high beam indicator light

Headlight low beam indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Slip indicator light/traction control system offindicator light


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

10



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

165


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentClock 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and portable ashtray 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets (12 VDC) 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet (115 VAC) 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary box 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seatback tables 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage storage boxes 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie- down hooks and tire tie- down belts 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage deck rails 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 10


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

166


To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time indi-cator will be reduced.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.After it finishes heating up, it automati-cally pops out ready for use.

If the engine is not running, the key mustbe in the “ACC” position.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter orequivalent for replacement.

PORTABLE ASHTRAY

The ashtray can be removed and usedoutside the vehicle. To use the ashtray,open the lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, close the lidcompletely.

To remove the ashtray, pull it out from thefront cup holder.

ClockCigarette lighter and portableashtray


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

167


CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always completely closethe ashtray after use.

Instrument panel

Rear console box

The power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of 12V/120W (instrument panel and rearconsole box outlets together).

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting anything other than an ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid to get intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

Power outlets (12 VDC)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

168


This power outlet is designed for useas a power supply for electric ap-pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

NOTICE

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinganything other than an appropriateplug that fits the outlet may causeelectrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances eventhough their power consumption is un-der 115 VAC/100W. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode- ray tube type televisions,compressor- driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

Power outlet (115 VAC)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

169


The direction is indicated on the insiderear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off withthe system on, the system will automati-cally turn back on when the ignition switchis turned on.

To turn on the compass, push and holdthe “ ” switch until the display turnson.To turn off the compass, push and holdthe “ ” switch until the display turnsoff.

The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading north.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

� The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe inside rear view mirror.)

� The battery has been disconnected.

If your vehicle is out of the set zone,refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”below to set the zone number.

If the deviation is small, the compassworks to calibrate the direction automati-cally while the vehicle is in motion.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

Compass


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

170


Compass sensor

The compass sensor is in the insiderear view mirror.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the inside rear view mirrorof the vehicle. Doing this may causemalfunction of the compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,then push and hold the both personal lightswitches until the zone number appearson the display. Then push the right sideor left side personal light switch, referringto the following map to select the numberof the zone where the vehicle is.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

171


Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns it to the compassmode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

172


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Torectify this, stop the vehicle and push andhold the both personal light switches until“C” appears on the display.

If “C” appears on the display because ofa drastic change in the magnetic field,perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5mph) or less. If there is not enough spaceto drive in a circle, drive around theblock.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the abovemethod, calibration is completed when thedirection is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed becauseof the magnetized vehicle etc., take yourvehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

173


CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

To open the glove box door, pull thelever.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

To use the box, pull on the handle.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Do not use this auxiliary box as anashtray.

Glove box Auxiliary box (type A)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

174


To use the box, push the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

To use the box, push the knob.

To remove the auxiliary box, open the boxand pull it up.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Do not use this auxiliary box as anashtray.

To access the rear console box, pull upthe lock release lever while raising therear console box lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

Auxiliary box (type B) Auxiliary box (type C) Rear console box (type A)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

175


UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the con-sole box lid without touching the lockrelease lever.

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull upthe lock release lever while raising therear console box lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the console box closedwhile driving.

Rear console box (type B)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

176


Front

Rear

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink- cans securely.

Rear cup holder—To use the holder, pullit out.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink- cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� Rear cup holder—To reduce thechance of injury in case of an acci-dent or sudden stop while driving,keep the cup holder closed when itis not in use.

Front passenger’s seatback

Rear right side seatback

Cup holders Seatback tables


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

177


You can use the front passenger’s seat-back and rear right side seatback as atemporary table only when the vehicleis stopped.

To use the seatback table, fold the seat-back down. For detailed information, see“—Fold- down front passenger’s seat” onpage 39 or “Fold- down rear seat” on page40 in Section 1- 3.

CAUTION

To avoid serious injury:

� Do not set up the seatback tablewhile the vehicle is moving.

� Do not sit on the seatback table.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat, avoidputting heavy loads on the temporarytable.

Front

Rear

To open the luggage storage box, turnthe knobs to the “UNLOCK” positionand open the lid. To close the luggagestorage box, lower the lid and turn theknobs to the “LOCK” position.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the luggage storageboxes closed and locked while driv-ing.

Luggage storage boxes


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

178


Rear luggage storage box—

To keep the lid open, attach the hook asshown above.

NOTICE

Do not close the back door with thehook attached, or the hook may bedamaged.

Keep the hook stored in its original posi-tion as shown when it is not in use.

To secure your luggage, use the tie-down hooks as shown above.

The tire tie- down belts are designed tosecure the flat tire. You can also use thebelts to secure your luggage. (To securethe flat tire, see “—Stowing flat tire” onpage 239 in Section 4.)

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 207in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

Tie- down hooks and tiretie- down belts


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

179


To tighten

To loosen

To hook

To unhook

To use the tire tie- down belts, do asshown in the illustration.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie-down hooks retracted and the tiretie- down belts stored in the luggagestorage box when not in use.

To use the luggage deck rails, youmust install genuine Toyota accessoriesor their equivalent for the deck rails.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions when installing a genuineToyota accessory or equivalent.


CAUTION

When you secure cargo with the lug-gage deck rails, be sure follow theinstructions below in order to avoidthe cargo coming loose:

� Do not place cargo exceeding 31 kg(70 lb.) on the luggage deck rails.

� To prevent luggage or cargo fromsliding forward during braking,make sure the deck rail accessoriessuch as tie- down hooks are secure-ly attached on the deck rails.

� When the rear seats are foldeddown, they are not locked intoplace and may move. After drivingon rough roads or at high speeds,cargo attached to the seat backrails may have moved out of place.Check the cargo and secure it againif necessary.

Luggage deck rails


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

180


To use the luggage cover:

1. Attach the left side hooks of the lug-gage cover to the left side uppertie- down hooks.

2. Attach the right side hooks of theluggage cover to the right side up-per tie- down hooks.

3. Pull the belt ends of the right sidehooks to secure the luggage cover.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggagecover. Such items may be thrownabout and possibly injure people inthe vehicle during sudden braking ora collision.

To remove the luggage cover, loosenthe right side belts of the hooks asshown above. Then remove the hooksfrom tie- down hooks.

When you remove the luggage cover, foldup and store it in the luggage storagebox.

Luggage cover


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

181


Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have twoholes, then it is designed for use with twolocking clips. Fix the floor mat with lock-ing clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

182



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

11


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass hatch 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toyota vehicle intrusion protection system (TVIP) 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

12


Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys workin every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key also works inevery lock.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

When using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the side doors and back door canbe locked without a key, you should al-ways carry a spare master key in caseyou accidentally lock your keys inside thevehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

Keys


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

13


� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after remov-ing other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.

� Do not bend the key grip.

� Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

14


KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

Without Toyota vehicle intrusion protec-tion system

With Toyota vehicle intrusion protectionsystem

Engine immobilizer system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

15


The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.

If any of the following indicator conditionsoccurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light stays on exceptwhen the Toyota vehicle intrusionprotection system is setting or activat-ing. (See “Toyota vehicle intrusionprotection system (TVIP)” on page 28in this Section.)

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

� The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobilizer sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, proper opera-tion of the system cannot be guaran-teed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

16


1. “LOCK” switch

2. “UNLOCK” switch

3. “HATCH GLASS” switch

4. “PANIC” switch

The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door, open the glasshatch or activate the “PANIC” modefrom a distance within approximately 1m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the transmitter.

� Do not leave the transmitter in placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors or alarm, oroperate from a normal distance:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “—Replacingtransmitter battery” on page 18.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” on page 248 inSection 4.)

This complies with Part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

Wireless remote control—


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

17


Locking operation

Unlocking operation

To lock and unlock all the side doorsand back door, push the switches ofthe transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All theside doors and back door are locked si-multaneously. At this time, turn signallights flash once.

Check to see that all the side doors andback door are securely locked.

If any of side doors or back door is notsecurely closed, or if the key is in theignition switch, locking cannot be per-formed by the “LOCK” switch.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously. At this time, turn signallights flash twice.

When the interior light dial is in the doorposition, and all the side doors and backdoor are unlocked simultaneously with awireless remote control transmitter, the in-terior lights come on for about 15 secondsand then fade out, even if the door is notopened. (For further information, see “Inte-rior/instrument panel light control” on page97 in Section 1−5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will be automati-cally locked again.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

—Locking and unlockingdoors


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

18


To open the glass hatch, push the“HATCH GLASS” switch of the transmit-ter for 1 second.

If the ignition key is in the “ON” position,the glass hatch cannot be opened by the“HATCH GLASS” switch.

See “Glass hatch” on page 27 in thisSection.

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows thehorn intermittently and flashes theheadlights, turn signal lights and interi-or lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, do the following:

� Push any of the switch on the wirelessremote control transmitter.

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.

For replacement, use a CR2032 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed transmitter battery orcomponents.

NOTICE

� During replacing the transmitterbattery, do not push the “LOCK”,“UNLOCK” and “HATCH GLASS”switches many times.

� When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-ing these procedures:

—Opening glass hatch —Activating panic mode—Replacing transmitterbattery


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

19


1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

3. Put in a new transmitter battery withpositive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery are faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

20


� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the transmitter bat-tery and that dust or oils do notadhere to the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

Vehicles with power door lock system—

All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with either frontdoor. In the driver’s door lock, turning thekey once will unlock the driver’s door andtwice in succession will unlock all the sidedoors and back door simultaneously.

When the interior light control dial is inthe door position, and all the side doorsand back door are unlocked simultaneous-ly with a key or wireless remote controltransmitter, the interior lights come on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out, evenif the door is not opened. (For furtherinformation, see “Interior/instrument panellight control” on page 97 in Section 1−5.)

Side doors—


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

21


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pullingthe inside handle even if the lock knobsare in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of thefront doors while driving. The doorswill open and an accident may occur.Toyota strongly recommends that allchildren be placed in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

Vehicles with power door lock system—Doors cannot be locked when either frontdoor is open and the key is in the igni-tion.

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

22


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side.To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locksor unlocks all the side doors and backdoor.

If you do either of the followings, no sidedoor or back door can be unlocked withthe power door lock switch.

� Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when all the side doors andback door are closed.

� Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.

The power door lock switch can be resetin the following ways.

� Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

� Unlock all the side doors and backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

� Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the sidedoors and back door with the powerdoor lock switch.

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, youcannot open the rear door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

23


CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle during an accident. It also helpsprevent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

You can select the following modes ofthe automatic locking and unlockingfunctions. The initial mode is mode 1.

� Mode 1—Automatic locking linkedwith the shift position

All the side doors and back door areautomatically locked when the shift le-ver is moved out of the “P” positionwith the ignition switch in the “ON”position and all the doors are closed.

� Mode 2—Functions cancelled

Automatic door locking and unlockingfunctions do not activate in this mode.

� Mode 3—Automatic locking and un-locking linked with the shift position

Locking function—All the side doorsand back door are automatically lockedwhen the shift lever is moved out ofthe “P” position with the ignition switchin the “ON” position and all the doorsare closed.

Unlocking function—All the side doorsand back door are automatically un-locked when the shift lever is movedto the “P” position with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position.

� Mode 4—Automatic locking and un-locking linked with the shift positionand ignition switch

Locking function—All the side doorsand back door are automatically lockedwhen the shift lever is moved out ofthe “P” position with the ignition switchin the “ON” position and all the doorsare closed.

Unlocking function—All the side doorsand back door are automatically un-locked when the ignition switch isturned from the “ON” position to the“ACC” or “LOCK” position.

CHANGING THE MODE

The mode toggles through from mode1 to mode 4. To change the mode, dothe following:

1. Set the interior light control dial to thedoor position. (See “Interior/instrumentpanel light control” on page 97 in Sec-tion 1−5.)

2. Shift the shift lever into the “P” posi-tion and close all the side doors andback door.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

—Automatic door locking andunlocking functions (vehicleswith automatic transmission)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

24


4. Within 5 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position,push and hold the power door lockswitch on the front side for about 5seconds.

5. The interior light will flash to indicatethat the mode has been changed.

The flashing of the interior light indicatesthe mode which has been selected.

� Flashing once, the function haschanged to mode 1.

� Flashing twice, the function haschanged to mode 2.

� Flashing three times, the function haschanged to mode 3.

� Flashing four times, the function haschanged to mode 4.

If the battery is disconnected or run down,the mode is changed into initial mode(mode 1).

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

Automatic operation (to open only):Push the switch completely down and thenrelease it. The window will fully open. Tostop the window partway, lightly pull theswitch up and then release it.

Power windows


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

25


Window lockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passenger’s win-dow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

26


� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.

If you turn the key fully clockwise, theglass hatch will open. (See “Glass hatch”on page 27 in this Section.)

To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

To open the back door, pull the lock re-lease lever.

Operating the power door lock switch orwireless remote control transmitter simul-taneously locks or unlocks the back door.(See “—Locking and unlocking doors” onpage 17 and “Side doors” on page 20 inthis Section.)

When closing the back door, the insidehandle can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.


Back door


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

27


CAUTION

Keep the back door and glass hatchclosed while driving. This not onlykeeps the luggage from being thrownout but also prevents exhaust gasesfrom entering the vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the back doorand glass hatch dampers, do not ap-ply any force, paint or let any otherforeign matter on them. OPENING THE GLASS HATCH WITH

THE KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit fully clockwise (one step further thanthe back door locking position).

The glass hatch can be opened with thewireless remote control transmitter. See“—Opening glass hatch” on page 18 inthis Section.

OPENING THE GLASS HATCH WITHTHE GLASS HATCH OPENER SWITCH

Push the glass hatch opener switchwhen the vehicle is stopped.

CAUTION

Do not open the glass hatch whilethe vehicle is moving.

Glass hatch


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

28


If you do either of the followings, theglass hatch cannot be opened with theglass hatch opener switch.

� Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when the front doors areclosed.

� Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.

The glass hatch opener switch can bereset in the following ways.

� Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

� Unlock all the doors with the key orwireless remote control transmitter.

� Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the doorswith the power door lock switch.

CLOSING THE GLASS HATCH

Lower the glass hatch and push thelower center of it until it is locked.

When you open the back door with theglass hatch opened, the glass hatch willbe closed. After closing the back door,you should check the glass hatch fullyclosed.


CAUTION

Keep the back door and glass hatchclosed while driving. This not onlykeeps the luggage from being thrownout but also prevents exhaust gasesfrom entering the vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the back doorand glass hatch dampers, do not ap-ply any force, paint or let any otherforeign matter on them.

TVIP is a theft deterrent system. Ifsomeone attempts to damage or breakinto your vehicle, the system soundsthe alarm while flashing the lights.

Toyota vehicle intrusionprotection system (TVIP)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

29


SETTING THE SYSTEM

You can set the system as follows.

1. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

The indicator light will start flashing whenthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”on page 14 for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close all the side doors, back door andglass hatch securely.

4. Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter. At this time, the TVIP indi-cator light comes on.

The system will be set in 30 seconds.When the system is set, the indicatorlight will start flashing again.

5. Make sure that the indicator lightflashes. Then you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system because unlockingfrom the inside activates the alarm.

Activating the alarm

If the system detects a threat to thevehicle, it sounds the alarm for oneminute while flashing headlights andturn signal lights. Also, the interiorlights turn on when the interior lightdial is in the door position.

The system detects a threat under any ofthe following conditions:

� Either of the front doors is unlocked bymeans other than the key or wirelessremote control transmitter.

If the key is not in the ignition switch,all the side doors and back door willbe automatically locked again.

� Any of the side doors, back door orglass hatch are forcibly opened.

The alarm will activate when the backdoor is unlocked with a key. Cancel thesystem before unlocking the back door.

� The side windows are tapped or bro-ken.

� The battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

� The ignition is hotwired.

After one minute, the alarm automaticallystops and the indicator light starts flashingagain.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, until you cancel the system, thesystem automatically resets the alarm af-ter the alarm has stopped.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in “Activat-ing the alarm”.

Stopping the alarm

You can stop the alarm in either of thefollowing ways:

� Unlock any of the side doors and backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

� Place the ignition switch in the “ON”position.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

30


CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

You can cancel the system as describedin “Stopping the alarm”.

If you cancel the system by unlocking anyof the side doors but no door is openedwithin 30 seconds, all the side doors andback door lock automatically and the sys-tem will be set again.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

You can check the system operation asfollows.

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described in“SETTING THE SYSTEM”.

3. Unlock the driver’s door with the insidelock knob. The system should activateand the alarm should sound.

4. Stop the alarm as described in “Stop-ping the alarm”.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the otherdoors. (For rear side doors, unlock andthen open the doors in step 3.)

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

Hood


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

31


3. Hold the hood open by inserting thesupport rod into the slot.

To insert the support rod into the slot,move it straight up. If it is moved to theside or toward the inside of the vehicle,it may become detached.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. and return the support rod to itsclip—this prevents rattles. Then lower thehood and make sure it locks into place.If necessary, press down gently on thefront edge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod intothe slot, make sure the rod supportsthe hood securely from falling downon to your head or body.

NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod toits clip before closing the hood. Clos-ing the hood with the support rod upcould cause the hood to bend.

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

Fuel tank cap


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

32


1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever up.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

� When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap counterclockwise by 90 de-grees (to the pressure point 1), andthen turn it an additional 30 degrees(to point 2). Pause slightly beforeremoving it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be stored onthe back side of the fuel filler door.

Position the cap so that the hooks pointto the left and right, and set it in thereceptacle on the back side of the door.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

33


When installing the cap, turn the capclockwise until you hear a click. Whenyou hear the click, the cap is fullyclosed.

If the cap is not installed securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel spillage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, applyforce only in the turning direction tothe cap. Do not pull or pry it.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use theswitch beside the personal light.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the rearside.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

To close: Push the switch on the frontside.

As a precaution when closing, the roofstops at the half closed position beforefully closing. Therefore, release the switchand then push it again to close it com-pletely.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “UP”side.To lower: Push the switch on the oppositeside of the “UP” side.

You may stop the moon roof at any de-sired position. The roof will move whilethe switch is being pushed and stop whenreleased except to slide open.

Electric moon roof


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

34


CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be seriously in-jured if the vehicle stops suddenlyor if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

� Before you close the moon roof,always make sure there is nobodyaround the moon roof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in death or serious injury.When anyone closes the moon roof,first make sure it is safe to do so.

� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the moon roof switches and gettrapped in the roof opening. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

35


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold- down rear seat 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS airbags 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 3


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

36


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a foldeddown seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be se-verely injured in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,severe injuries can occur in theevent of emergency braking or acollision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non- slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

SeatsFront seats— —Front seat precautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

37


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of front seatsequipped with side airbags. Suchchanges may prevent the side air-bags from activating correctly, dis-able the system or cause the sideairbags to inflate accidentally, re-sulting in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

� Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat- lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Seat adjustment precautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

38


� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION HEIGHT ADJUSTINGLEVER

Pull up or push down the lever.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

—Adjusting front seats


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

39


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor personal injury.

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-est position and fix the seatback atthe most upright lock position.

2. Pull up either seatback lock releaseknob beside the seatback and foldthe seatback down.

CAUTION

Do not sit on or place anything onthe folded seatback to avoid seriousinjury while the vehicle is moving.

—Fold- down frontpassenger’s seat


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

40


You can use the front passenger’s seat-back as a temporary table only when thevehicle is stopped.

CAUTION




NOTICE


CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, make sure the seat-back is securely locked by pushingforward and rearward on the top ofthe seatback. Failure to do so willprevent seat belt from operating prop-erly.

Lower the head restraints to the lowestposition. Pull up the lock release buttonand fold the seatback down.

Each seatback can be folded separately.

This will enlarge the luggage compartmentas far as the seatbacks. See “—Stowageprecautions” on page 207 in Section 2 forprecautions when loading luggage.

Fold- down rear seat


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

41


You can use the rear right side seatbackas a temporary table only when the ve-hicle is stopped.

CAUTION




NOTICE


CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventpersonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

� Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatbackand that the red mark at the buttonon the top of the seatback cannotbe seen. Failure to do so will pre-vent seat belt from operating prop-erly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in the properposition and are ready to use.

Front

Rear

Head restraints


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

42


For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 69 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

43


CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal co llision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or personal in-jury.

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belt—they may se-verely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page 253in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

—Fastening front and rearseat belts


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

44


When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 69 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from injury.

Take upslack

Too high

Keeps as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

� Both high- positioned lap belts andloose- fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended event. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

� Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

45


Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your s houlder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injures in a collision.

To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

46


If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer toorder the proper required length for theextender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-pect to wear for proper measurement andselection of length. Additional ordering in-formation is available at your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofpersonal injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

� Make sure the front passenger oc-cupant classification indicator lightindicates “ON” when using the seatbelt extender for the front passen-ger seat. If the indicator light indi-cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-er tongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-nect the seat belt extender aftermaking sure the indicator light indi-cates “ON”. If you use the seat beltextender while the indicator lightindicates “OFF”, the front passen-ger airbag and side airbag on thefront passenger side may not acti-vate correctly, which could causedeath or serious injury in the eventof collision.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

—Seat belt extender


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

47


� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from injury.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

48


The driver and front passenger seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact, the front seat belts are quicklydrawn back by the retractors so that thebelts snugly restrain the occupants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 65 in thisSection.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

The seat belt pretensioner system mainlyconsists of the following components andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front passenger occupant classificationindicator light

4. Front passenger occupant classificationsystem (ECU and sensors)

5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

7. Airbag sensor assembly

—Seat belt pretensioners


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

49


The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non- toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tions may prevent the seat belt pre-tensioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two- way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

50


This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system and indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, warning light, interconnecting wiringand power sources. (For details, see “Ser-vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-ers” on page 107 in Section 1- 6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on for more than 6seconds or flashes.

� The light comes on or starts flashingwhile driving.

� If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunctionor activation of the relevant seat beltpretensioner.

� The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe seat belt pretensioners to operate.

� Either seat belt pretensioner assemblyor surrounding area is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work together withthe seat belts to help reduce injury byinflating. The SRS front airbags help re-duce injuries mainly to the driver’s or frontpassenger’s head or chest caused by hit-ting the vehicle interior.

SRS airbags——SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

51


The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy if lug-gage is put in the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up, regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 65 in thisSection.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

� The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. For in-structions and precautions concern-ing the seat belt system, see “Seatbelts” on page 42 in this Section.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 69 in thisSection.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

52


The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicles has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally notdesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, when ever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.

Hitting a curb, edgeof pavement orhard surface

Falling into orjumping overa deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

53


The SRS front airbag system mainly con-sists of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors



4. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)



7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

8. Driver’s seat position sensor


10. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the infla-tors very quickly fills the airbags withnon- toxic gas to help restrain the forwardmotion of the occupants. The front airbagsthen quickly deflate, so that there is noobstruction of the driver’s vision should itbe necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non- toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

54


CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page36 in this Section.

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.

� Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 69 in this Sec-tion.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

55


� Do not put anything or any part ofyour baby on or in front of thedashboard or steering wheel padthat houses the front airbag sys-tem. They might restrict inflation orcause death or serious injury asthey are projected rearward by theforce of the deploying airbags. Like-wise, the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag cover, frontpassenger airbag or airbag sensorassembly. Doing so may prevent thefront airbag system from activatingcorrectly, cause sudden activationof the system or disable the sys-tem, which could result in death orserious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with physical disability, con-sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-gerously interfere with the SRS frontairbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

56


This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags are operat-ing properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system and indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, warning light, interconnecting wiringand power sources. (For details, see “Ser-vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-ers” on page 107 in Section 1- 6.)




The SRS warning light will come on andfront passenger occupant classification in-dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there isa malfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.


� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

57


NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and rear outside passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest and theSRS curtain shield airbags help reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-senger’s or rear outside passenger’s head.

The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put inthe seat, or the seat belt is buckled up,regardless of the presence of an occupantin the seat. (As for the front passengeroccupant classification system, see“—Front passenger occupant classificationsystem” on page 65 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-senger side are activated even with nopassenger in the front seat or rear outsideseat.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

—SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

58


CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver, frontpassenger and rear outside passen-ger seat belt systems. To ensuremaximum protection in an accident,the driver and all passengers in thevehicle must wear their seat beltsproperly. Wearing a seat belt prop-erly during an accident reduces thechances of death or serious injuryor being thrown out of the vehicle.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seat belt system,see “Seat belts” on page 42 in thisSection.

� Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, p illar, rear pillar or roof siderail from which the SRS side airbagand curtain shield airbag deployeven if he/she is a child seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the SRS side airbag andcurtain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact of the deploying airbagcould cause death or serious injuryto the occupant.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page69 in this Section.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

59


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system may not activate if thevehicle is subjected to a collision fromthe side at certain angles, or a collisionto the side of the vehicle body otherthan the passenger compartment asshown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are designed to inflate when thepassenger compartment area suffers a se-vere impact from the side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags are not generally designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low- speed sidecollision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.



3. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)


5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

60




The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non- toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non- toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillars, and roof side rail may behot for several minutes, but the airbagsthemselves will not be hot. The airbagsare designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andrear outside passengers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.

� Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag, and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

61


� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead closer to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windowssince the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

62


� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andrear pillars, roof side rail and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

63


� Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderails containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with physical disability, con-sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-gerously interfere with the SRS frontairbags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are operating properly.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

64


This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system and indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, infla-tors, warning light, interconnecting wiringand power sources. (For details, see “Ser-vice reminder indicators and warning buzz-ers” on page 107 in Section 1- 6.)




The SRS warning light will come on andfront passenger occupant classification in-dicator light will indicate “OFF” if there isa malfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.


� Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the SRSside airbag (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

� The portion of the front pillars, rearpillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-ding) containing the curtain shield air-bags inside (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

65


Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions1—4 in the table on page 67 and basedon these conditions activates or deacti-vates front passenger airbags. The sys-tem monitors the weight and load onthe front passenger seat, and the seatbelt buckle switch to determine condi-tions 1—4. In order for the system todetect the conditions correctly, do notdo any of the following.

� Put a heavy load on the front passen-ger seat.

� Attach a commercial seatback table tothe front passenger seatback.

� Put weight on the front passenger byputting your hands or feet on the frontpassenger seatback from the rear pas-senger seat.

The front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light indicates the ac-tuation of the front passenger airbag,side airbag on the front passenger seatand front passenger’s seat belt preten-sioner.

The indicator light will indicate “OFF”when the ignition switch is in the “ON”position with the condition 2 in the tableshown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that a person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, oneof the following is likely to have occurred:

� A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

� Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

� The front passenger seatback is incontact with the rear seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects anadult sitting in the front passenger seat,make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-minated when an adult is seated in thefront passenger seat. If the “OFF” indica-tor is illuminated, ask the passenger to situp straight, well back in the seat, andwith the seat belt worn correctly. If the“OFF” indicator still remains illuminated,either ask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible, movethe front passenger seat fully rearward.

—Front passenger occupantclassification system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

66


The front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light will indicate “ON”and “OFF” when the ignition key isturned to the “ON” position. Afterabout four seconds, it will go off. Afterthat, the front passenger occupant clas-sification system operates and judgeswhether to indicate “ON” or “OFF”.

The SRS warning light will come onand front passenger occupant classifi-cation indicator light will indicate“OFF” if there is a malfunction in thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

67


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detected bythe front passenger

occupant classificationsystem

Frontpassengeroccupant

classificationindicator light

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltreminder light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbagon the frontpassenger

seat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult∗1 “ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated

2. Child∗2 or childrestraint system∗3 “OFF” Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated Activated

3. Unoccupied Notilluminated

Off Off DeactivatedActivated

Deactivated

4. There is amalfunction in thesystem

“OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear- facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward- facing child restraint system should only beinstalled on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 69 in this Section as for installing thechild restraint system.)

∗4: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

68


CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following.

� Make sure the front passenger oc-cupant classification indicator lightindicates “ON” when using the seatbelt extender for the front passen-ger seat. If the indicator light indi-cates “OFF”, disconnect the extend-er tongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-nect the seat belt extender aftermaking sure the indicator light indi-cates “ON”. If you use the seat beltextender while the indicator lightindicates “OFF”, the front passen-ger airbag and side airbag on thefront passenger side may not acti-vate correctly, which could causedeath or serious injury in the eventof collision.

� Do not recline the front passengerseatback so far that it touches arear seat. This may cause the“OFF” indicator to be illuminated,which indicates that the passen-ger’s airbags will not deploy in theevent of a severe accident. If theseatback touches the rear seat, re-turn the seatback to a positionwhere it does not touches the rearseat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

� If an adult sits in the front passen-ger seat, the occupant classificationindicator light should indicate “ON”.If the “OFF” indicator is illumina-ted, ask the passenger to sit upstraight, well back in the seat, feeton the floor, and with the seat beltworn correctly. If the “OFF” indica-tor still remains illuminated, eitherask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible,move the front passenger seat fullyrearward.

� Wear the seat belt properly.

� Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

� Do not put a heavy load in thefront passenger seatback pocket orattach a seatback table to the frontpassenger seat seatback.

� Do not put weight on the front pas-senger seat by putting your handsor feet on the front passenger seatseatback from the rear passengerseat.

� Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

� Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

� Child restraint systems installed onthe rear seat should not contact thefront seatbacks.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

69


� When it is unavoidable to install theforward- facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Installation with seatbelt” on page 72 in this Section.)

� Do not remove the front seats.

� Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The front passenger occupant classifica-tion indicator light may indicate “ON” (thefront passenger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat may deploy)even if observing the above cautions,when a child sits in, or a forward- facingchild restraint system is installed on thefront passenger seat. Refer to all the cau-tions in “SRS airbags” on page 50 and“Child restraint” on page 69 in this Sec-tion.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 42 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear- facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the front passengeroccupant classification indicatorlight indicates “OFF”. In the eventof an accident, the impact of therapid inflation of the front passen-ger airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

70


� A forward- facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the front pas-senger occupant classification indi-cator light indicates “OFF”, becausethe front passenger airbag could in-flate with considerable speed andforce. Otherwise, the child may bekilled or seriously injured.

� Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/herbody against the door or the areaof the seat, front or rear pillar orroof side rail from which the sideairbags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and cur-tain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact could cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure you have complied withall installation instructions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand that the system is properly se-cured. If it is not secured properly,it may cause death or serious injuryto the child in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’s in-structions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit in the trunk or somewhere other thanthe passenger compartment. This will pre-vent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

—Child restraint system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

71


Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 82 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 84 in this Sec-tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

(C) Booster seat

—Types of child restraintsystem


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

72


(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear-facing position only.

CAUTION


� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the rear seat if it interfereswith the lock mechanism of thefront seats. Otherwise, the child orfront seat occupant(s) may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat. Child restraint systeminstalled on the rear seat shouldnot contact the front seatbacks.

—Installation with seat belt


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

73


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

74


3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

75


(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward- facing or rear- facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theapplicable age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward- facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat without puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

76


The front passenger occupant classifica-tion indicator light should indicate “OFF”when the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion and the child is in the child restraintsystem after following these procedures.The “OFF” indicator indicates the SRSfront passenger airbag and side airbag onthe passenger side will not deploy. If theindicator light indicates “ON”, remove thechild restraint system and reinstall it withthe ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”position. If the indicator light still indicates“ON” when the ignition key is turned tothe “ON” position, then the SRS front pas-senger airbag and side airbag on the pas-senger side may deploy in an accident.Do not drive the vehicle in this condition.Remove the child restraint system andcontact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear- facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward- facing child re-straint system should only beinstalled on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward- facing childrestraint system in the proper or-der. Otherwise, the front passengeroccupant classification system cannot detect the presence of the childrestraint system and the front pas-senger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat coulddeploy.



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

77


Move seatfully back




� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the rear rightseat. Child restraint systeminstalled on the rear seat shouldnot contact the front seatbacks.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

78


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION




2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

79


3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

80


(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward- facing position only.

Move seatfully back

CAUTION




’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

81


1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and across thechild following the instructions providedby its manufacturer and insert the tabinto the buckle taking care not to twistthe belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 42 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s s houlder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� Both high- positioned lap belts andloose- fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.





’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

82


2. To remove the child restraint system,press the buckle release button andallow the belt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets in the luggagecompartment to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seating position.

This symbol indicates the location of theanchor bracket.

—Using a top strap


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

83


TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Outside anchor brackets only—Remove the head restraint.

2. Open the lid of the anchor bracket. 3. Securely fasten the child restraintsystem with the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 69 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

84


4. Outside anchor brackets only—Replace the head restraint.

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle. Canada only

Type A

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

85


Canada only

Type B

For owners in Canada

The symbol on a child restraint systemindicates the presence of a lower connec-tor system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages near the button on theseatback.

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps ontothe anchorages and tighten the lowerstraps.

Type B—

1. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages near the button on theseatback.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor-ages.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 82 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

86



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

87


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt steering wheel 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti- glare inside rear view mirror 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti- glare inside rear view mirror 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 4


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

88


To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, push down thelock release lever, tilt the steeringwheel to the desired angle and returnthe lever to its original position.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

89


CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de- icer to freethe mirror.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

90


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti-glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the automatic functionmode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

Anti- glare inside rear viewmirror

Auto anti- glare inside rearview mirror


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

91


In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off the automatic function, pushand release the “ ” switch. The indica-tor light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic function again,push and release the “ ” switch. Theindicator light will turn on.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION


To ensure correct functioning of ananti- glare mirror sensors located onboth sides of the mirror, do not touchor cover the sensors with your fingeror a piece of cloth, etc.

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the sun visor, remove it from thehook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-tion 2).

Vehicles with SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags—

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,slide the sun visor (to position 3).

Sun visors—


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

92


CAUTION

Do not slide the sun visor when thevisor is in the position 1. It can coverthe anti- glare inside rear view mirrorand obstruct the rear view.

Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side

Driver’s side only—To use the vanitymirror, open the cover.

—Vanity mirrors


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

93


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior/instrument panel light control 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window wiper and washer 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window defogger 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

94


For the U.S.A.

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator (greenlight) on the instrument panel will tell youthat the tail lights are on.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

For the U.S.A.—The headlight low beamindicator light (green light) on the instru-ment panel will tell you that the lowbeams are on.

Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer will remind you to turn the lightsoff when the driver’s door is opened if youremove the key with the headlight switchon.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light system (for the U.S.A.)

The daytime running light system canmake it easier for others to see the frontof your vehicle during the day. This sys-tem can be helpful in many different driv-ing conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn andbefore sunset.

This system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

� The engine is running.

� The parking brake is released.

� The headlight/turn signal lever knob isin the “OFF” position.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn theheadlights to full intensity for night driving.

The headlights automatically switch to fullor reduced intensity depending on thedarkness of the surroundings when thedaytime running light system is activated.Also, the other exterior lights and instru-ment panel lights automatically turn on oroff.

Headlights and turn signals


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

95


The daytime running light control sensoris on the top of the driver’s side instru-ment panel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

Daytime running light system (for Canada)

The daytime running light system canmake it easier for others to see the frontof your vehicle during the day. This sys-tem can be helpful in many different driv-ing conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn andbefore sunset.

This system will make your headlightscome on at a reduced brightness when:

� The engine is running.

� The parking brake is released.

� The headlight/turn signal lever knob isin the “OFF” position or position 1.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn theheadlights to full intensity for night driving.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

96


TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 292 in Section 7−3.

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

Emergency flashers


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

97


To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

OffOn

Door

INTERIOR LIGHTS

To turn on the interior lights, turn thedial.

The interior lights has the following posi-tions:

Off—Turns the light off.

On—Keeps the light on all the time.

Door—Turns the light on when any of theside doors, back door or glass hatch isopened. The light goes off when all theside doors, back door and glass hatch areclosed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

When the dial is in the door position, thelight comes on when any side door, backdoor or glass hatch is opened. After allthe side doors, back door and glass hatchare closed, the light remains on for about15 seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightgoes out immediately:

� All the side doors, back door and glasshatch are closed when the ignition keyis in the “ON” position.

� The ignition key is turned to the “ON”position after all the side doors, backdoor and glass hatch are closed.

� All the side doors and back door arelocked when the glass hatch is closedand the light is still on.

When any side door and back door isunlocked using either the key or the wire-less remote control transmitter, the lightwill come on and remain on for 15 sec-onds before fading out.

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the dial in the door positionfor 20 minutes or more.

Front fog lightsInterior/instrument panel lightcontrol


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

98


Fullintensityposition

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTS

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the dial.

Full intensity position: This position alwayskeeps the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights at full intensity even when thetail lights/headlights are turned on.

If you have to turn on the tail lights/head-lights in daytime, or if the daytime runninglight control sensor activates in circum-stances such as shade, the brightness ofinstrument cluster will be reduced. In thiscase, set the dial to the full intensity posi-tion.

Type A

Type B

Type C

To turn on the personal light, push theswitch. To turn the light off, push theswitch once again.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CUT OFF SYSTEM(type B and C only)

To prevent the battery from discharging,the lights will turn off automatically 20minutes after you turn the ignition switchto the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

Type B only—The lights will come onagain when you open any of the doors,and the lights will remain on for 20 min-utes.

Personal lights


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

99


This function will be cancelled when youturn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-tion.

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,push the lever up and release it.

With interval adjuster: The “INT” band letsyou adjust the wiping time interval whenthe wiper lever is in the intermittent posi-tion (position 1). Twist the band upward toincrease the time between sweeps, anddownward to decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 291 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Windshield wipers and washer


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

100


To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it. The rear window wip-er operates while the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 291 inSection 7−3.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Without navigation system

With navigation system

Rear window wiper andwasher Rear window defogger


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

101


To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the windowsurface. An indicator light will illuminate toindicate the defogger is operating.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefogger off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defogger have operated about 15minutes.

Make sure you turn the defogger off whenthe window is clear. Leaving the defoggeron for a long time could cause the batteryto discharge, especially during stop−and−go driving. The defogger is not designedfor drying rain water or for melting snow.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

102



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

103


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and two trip meters 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature display 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

104


Low fuel levelwarning light

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-ating or making turns. This is caused bythe movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the fuel gauge returns to “E” when theignition switch is turned to the “START”position.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

105


Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

� Towing a trailer.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the engine coolant temperature gaugereturns to “C” when the ignition switch isturned to the “START” position.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 230 inSection 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

2ZZ−GE engine only—The engine will notexceed 7100 rpm before it warms up.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the tachometer returns to the bottomposition when the ignition switch is turnedto the “START” position.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

Tachometer


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

106


This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B. The displayed temperature ranges from

−30�C (−22�F) up to 50�C (122�F).


If an abnormality exists in the connectionof the outside air temperature sensor, “−−”will appear on the display. If “−−” appearson the display, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−” appearsmomentarily when the ignition is quicklyturned to “ON”. It is normal if it goes outsoon.

Odometer and two trip meters Outside temperature display


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

107


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) or If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop and check.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Low fuel levelwarning light

Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

108



(h) orTake vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(i) Close all side doors, back door and glass hatch.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(l) Adjust tire inflation pressure and turn off warning light by pushing reset switch for afew seconds. If warning light remains, contact Toyota dealer.

(m) Add washer fluid.*

(n) Replace engine oil.

*: This symbol equipped only on vehiclessold in Canada.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

109



(o) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

(p) Light reminder buzzer Turn off lights.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

110


(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

� When the parking brake is applied...

Vehicles with anti−lock brake system—

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position even after the parking brakeis released.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

Vehicles with anti−lock brake system—

� The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

� The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may notwork properly and your stoppingdistance will become longer. De-press the brake pedal firmly andbring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

Vehicles with anti−lock brake sys-tem—

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andbuzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt isnot fastened. Unless the driver fastens thebelt, the light keeps flashing and thebuzzer stops after about 6 seconds.

If the vehicle speed rises above 15 km/h(9 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, thebuzzer will sound for 10 seconds. Then,if the seat belt is still unfastened, thebuzzer will sound in a different tone for20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speeddrops below 15 km/h (9 mph), the buzzerwill continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer stillsounds, make sure the front passenger’sseat belt is fastened.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

111


(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re-minder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tohave the front passenger buckle up theseat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front passenger seatand does not fasten the seat belt.

If the vehicle speed rises above 15 km/h(9 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, thebuzzer will sound for 10 seconds. Then,if the seat belt is still unfastened, thebuzzer will sound in a different tone for20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speeddrops below 15 km/h (9 mph), the buzzerwill continue to sound. To stop the buzzer,fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer stillsounds, make sure the driver’s seat beltis fastened.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight, the reminder light may flash andbuzzer to sound.

(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is beingdischarged.

If it comes on while you are driving, thereis a problem somewhere in the chargingsystem.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-ate, however, until the battery is dis-charged. Turn off the air conditioning,blower, radio,etc., and drive directly to thenearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the enginedrive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the engine starts. Thismeans that the warning light system isoperating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

112


� Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

� There is a problem somewhere in theengine, emission control system, elec-tronic throttle control system, automatictransmission electrical system or warn-ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

1ZZ−FE engine with two−wheel models—

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 262in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

Vehicles without vehicle stability controlsystem—

The light comes on with the ignition keyturned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if the system malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso the wheels could lock up during sud-den braking or braking on slippery roadsurfaces.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

113


If either of the following conditions oc-curs, this indicates a malfunction some-where in the components monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Vehicles with vehicle stability control sys-tem—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the systems malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, traction control system and thevehicle stability control system do not op-erate, but the brake system still operatesconventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden brake or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.





CAUTION


In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

114


(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the sidedoors, back door and glass hatch arecompletely closed.

(j) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.After about 6 seconds, the light will gooff. This means the systems of the air-bag and front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system and indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, warning light, interconnecting wiringand power sources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.


� The light comes on or flashes whiledriving.

(k) “VSC” Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem or traction control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, thesystem does not work. However, as con-ventional braking operates when applied,there is no problem to continue your driv-ing.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer:

� The warning light does not come onafter the ignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light remains on after theignition key is turned to “ON”.

� The warning light comes on while driv-ing.

The slip indicator light/traction control sys-tem off indicator light will come on whenthe “VSC” warning light comes on even ifthe “TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

(l) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire inflation pres-sure of any one of the tires is criticallylow. The light comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position. It goesoff after a few seconds. This indicatesthat the low tire pressure warning systemis functioning properly.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

115


If the light comes on while driving, adjusttire inflation pressure to the specified lev-el. (See “Tires” on page 306 in Section 8.)After the tire inflation pressure is adjusted,push the tire pressure warning systemreset switch for a few seconds and makesure the warning light goes off. If the lightstill remains or blinks once a second,have the low tire pressure warning systemchecked at your Toyota dealer.

If the light blinks once every three sec-onds, the low tire pressure warning sys-tem needs to be initialized.

For details, see “Tire pressure warningsystem” on page 128 in Section 1−7.

(m) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light (for vehicles sold inCanada)

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 291 inSection 7−3.)

(n) Engine Oil Replacement ReminderLight (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

This light reminds you when to replacethe engine oil.

This light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500miles) after the engine oil replacement,this light illuminates for about 3 secondsand then flashes for about 12 secondswith the ignition key turned to the “ON”position. If you continue driving withoutreplacing the engine oil, and if the dis-tance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000miles), the light will come on after theignition key is turned to “ON” position.The light will remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend thatyou replace the engine oil at an earlyopportunity depending on the driving androad conditions. If the light comes on,replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the system bythe following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position with the odometerreading shown. (For details, see“Odometer and two trip meters” onpage 106 in this Section.)

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the trip meterreset knob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5 sec-onds. The odometer indicates “000000”and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light willcontinue flashing.

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove thekey when you open the driver’s door withthe ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”position.

(p) Light Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer will sound if the headlightswitch is left on and the driver’s door isopened with the key removed from theignition switch.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

116


CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshieldwasher fluid level warning light*)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors, back dooror glass hatch.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door/hatch.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS”, “VSC”, low tirepressure warning light and engine oilreplacement reminder light go off aftera few seconds. The SRS warning lightgoes off after about 6 seconds.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.

*: When equipped


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

117


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch with steering lock 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual transmission 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 7


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

118


“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 211 in Section3.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleof the tachometer, fuel gauge or enginecoolant temperature gauge returns to thebottom position when the ignition switch isturned to the “START” position.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

It is not a malfunction even if the needleon the speedometer may move when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. On vehicleswith an automatic transmission, the selec-tor lever must be in the “P” position be-fore pushing the key.

Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobilizer system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobilizer system” on page 14in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

Two−wheel drive models—Approximatelyfive hours after the engine is turned off,you may hear sound coming from under-neath the luggage compartment for severalminutes. This is normal operation anddoes not indicate a malfunction. (See“Leak detection pump” on page ix.)

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

Never remove the key when the ve-hicle is moving, as this will lock thesteering wheel and result in loss ofsteering control.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steeringlock


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

119


Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position and the lock re-lease button depressed).

(a) Selector lever

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission

Lock release buttonTo prevent misshifting

With the brake pedal depressed,shift while holding the lockrelease button in. (The ignition switch must be in“ON” position.)

Shift while holding thelock release button in.

Shift normally.

Selector lever

Overdriveswitch


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

120


(b) Overdrive switch

You can select either third gear (withoverdrive off) or fourth gear (with over-drive on) by pushing this switch.

To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.The “O/D OFF” indicator light should comeon. To turn the overdrive on again, pushthe switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicatorlight should go off.

Always drive your vehicle with the over-drive on for better fuel economy andquieter driving.

If the engine is turned off when the over-drive is off and restarted, the overdrivewill automatically be on.

Vehicles with cruise control—When thecruise control is being used, even if youdownshift the transmission by pushing andreleasing the overdrive switch, enginebraking will not be enabled because thecruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 132 in thisSection.

(c) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 212 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always turn the overdrive on for betterfuel economy and quieter driving. If theengine coolant temperature is low, thetransmission will not shift into the over-drive gear even with the overdrive on.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Push the overdrive switch. The “O/DOFF” indicator light will come on andthe transmission will downshift to thirdgear.

� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models97 km/h (60 mph)

Four−wheel drive models96 km/h (59 mph)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

121


� Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models46 km/h (28 mph)

Four−wheel drive models48 km/h (29 mph)

Vehicles with cruise control—When thecruise control is being used, even if youdownshift the transmission by pushing andreleasing the overdrive switch, enginebraking will not be enabled because thecruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 132 in thisSection.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

(e) Using “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, youcan start the vehicle in motion as with thelever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “2”, the vehiclewill start in first gear and automaticallyshift to second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to over−rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

“2” 110 km/h (68 mph). . . . . . . . . . . “L” 60 km/h (37 mph). . . . . . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“2” or “L” position. This may causesevere automatic transmission dam-age from overheating. To preventsuch damage, “D” position shouldbe used in hill climbing or hardtowing.

(f) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

122


(g) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(h) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between third gear and over-drive when climbing a gentle slope, theoverdrive should be turned off. Be sureto turn the switch on immediately after-ward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse overdrive.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(i) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 247 in Section 4.

5−speed

6−speed

Manual transmission


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

123


The shift pattern is as shown above.

CAUTION

The shift lever knob can become ex-tremely hot after parking under thesun.

In case of driving your vehicle with6−speed manual transmission, the buzzerwill sound when you shift the gear into“R” (reverse).

Press the clutch pedal down fully whileshifting, and then release it slowly. Do notrest your foot on the pedal while driving,because it will cause clutch trouble. Donot use the clutch to hold the vehiclewhen stopped on an uphill grade—use theparking brake.

Recommended shifting speeds

The transmission is fully synchronized andupshifting or downshifting is easy.

For the best compromise between fueleconomy and vehicle performance, youshould upshift or downshift at the followingspeeds:

5−speedGear km/h (mph)

1 to 2 or 2 to 1 24 (15)2 to 3 or 3 to 2 40 (25)3 to 4 or 4 to 3 64 (40)4 to 5 or 5 to 4 72 (45)


1 to 2 or 2 to 1 24 (15)2 to 3 or 3 to 2 40 (25)3 to 4 or 4 to 3 64 (40)4 to 5 or 5 to 4 72 (45)5 to 6 or 6 to 5 80 (50)

Downshift to the appropriate gear if accel-eration is needed when you are cruisingbelow the above downshifting speeds.

Upshifting too soon or downshifting toolate will cause lugging and, possibly, ping-ing. Regularly revving the engine to maxi-mum speed in each gear will cause ex-cessive engine wear and high fuelconsumption.

Maximum allowable speeds

To get on a highway or to pass slowertraffic, maximum acceleration may be nec-essary. Make sure you observe the follow-ing maximum allowable speeds in eachgear:


1 58 (36)2 98 (61)3 142 (88)4 180 (112)


1 62 (38)2 96 (60)3 133 (83)4 169 (105)5 210 (130)

NOTICE

Do not downshift if you are goingfaster than the maximum allowablespeed for the next lower gear.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

124


Good driving practice

� If it is difficult to shift into reverse, putthe transmission in neutral, release theclutch pedal momentarily, and then tryagain.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse fifth gear (5−speed models) orsixth gear (6−speed models).

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to skid orspin.

NOTICE

Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before shifting into reverse.

The traction control system automatical-ly helps prevent the spinning of frontwheels when the vehicle is started oraccelerated on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against front wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at an appropriate and cautiousspeed for the present road condi-tions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE

Leave the system on during the ordi-nary driving so that it can operatewhen needed.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the trac-tion control system is in the self−checkmode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

Traction control system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

125


When the traction control system is oper-ating, the following conditions occur:

� The system controls the spinning of thefront wheels. At this time, the slip indi-cator light/traction control system offindicator light blinks.

� You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

The slip indicator light/traction control sys-tem off indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If the indicator light does notcome on when the ignition is turned on,contact your Toyota dealer.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE

When getting the vehicle out of mud ornewly fallen snow, etc., turn off thetraction control system. This systemthat controls engine performance inter-feres with the process of freeing frontwheels.

To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.

The slip indicator light/traction control sys-tem off indicator light will come on.

The vehicle stability control system is al-ways activated, even if the traction controlsystem is turned off.

To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switchonce again.

The slip indicator light/traction control sys-tem off indicator light will go off.

The slip indicator light/traction control sys-tem off indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. It will come on again when youpush the “TRAC OFF” switch to turn offthe traction control system.


� The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned “ON”.

� The indicator light remains on after theignition is turned on.

� The indicator light comes on with thenormal driving mode while driving.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

126


“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the traction control systemor the vehicle stability control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off aftera few seconds.







The vehicle stability control systemhelps provide integrated control of thesystems such as anti−lock brake sys-tem, traction control, engine control,etc. This system automatically controlsthe brakes and engine to help preventthe vehicle from skidding when corner-ing on a slippery road surface or oper-ating steering wheel abruptly.

This system will activate when your ve-hicle speed reaches or exceeds 15 km/h(9 mph), and will deactivate when the ve-hicle speed reduces to below 15 km/h (9mph).

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehiclebegins to move. This means that the sys-tem is in the self−check mode, but doesnot indicate a malfunction.

Vehicle stability controlsystem


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

127


CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle stability control system. Evenif the vehicle stability control sys-tem is operating, you must alwaysdrive carefully and attentively toavoid serious injury. Reckless driv-ing will result in an unexpected ac-cident. If the slip indicator lightflashes, an alarm sounds, and spe-cial care should be taken whiledriving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacture, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle stability controlsystem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 280 in Section 7−2.)

� In situations where the road surfaceis covered with ice or snow, yourvehicle should be fitted with snowtires or tire chains.

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-ing, the slip indicator light blinks and analarm sounds intermittently. Special careshould be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light/traction control sys-tem off indicator light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition key is turnedto “ON”. If you select the traction controloff mode, the indicator light will come onagain.


� The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition key is turned “ON”.

� The indicator light remains on after theignition is turned on.

� The indicator light comes on with thenormal driving mode while driving.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

128


“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle stability controlsystem or the traction control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON” and will go off aftera few seconds.







The tire pressure warning system is de-signed to provide warning when tireinflation pressure of any one of thetires is critically low while the vehicleis moving. The low tire pressure warn-ing light comes on to inform you thatsuch low tire pressure may hamperdriving.

This system is not designed to operatewhen the vehicle is stopped. Therefore,check the tire inflation pressure regularly.The recommended cold tire inflation pres-sure, tire size and the vehicle capacityweight are on the tire and loading informa-tion label. (For instructions, see “Checkingtire inflation pressure” on page 278 inSection 7−2.)

Installed tires should be of the specifiedsize. They should be of the same sizeand construction. If tires other than thespecified size are used, or if tires of dif-ferent sizes or constructions are mixed,the tire pressure warning system will notfunction properly.

Tire pressure warning system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

129


LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT

This light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. It goes offafter a few seconds. This indicates thatthe tire pressure warning system is func-tioning properly.

If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on or blinks while driving, dothe following.

If the warning light comes on:

1. Adjust the tire inflation pressure tothe specified level as soon as pos-sible. (See “Tires” on page 306 inSection 8.)

2. Push the tire pressure warning sys-tem reset switch for a few secondsand make sure the warning lightgoes off.

If the light remains on after the resetswitch has been pushed, have the tirepressure warning system checked at yourToyota dealer.

If you have a flat tire, replace it with thespare tire. For details, see “If you havea flat tire” on page 231 in Section 4.

If the warning light blinks once everysecond:

The low tire pressure warning system maybe malfunctioning. Contact your Toyotadealer.

If the warning light blinks once everythree seconds:

The low tire pressure warning systemneeds to be initialized. Reset the systemwith the tire pressure warning system re-set switch. (To reset the system, see“TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEMRESET SWITCH”.)

The tire pressure warning system doesnot function properly under certain cir-cumstances. In the following cases, thelow tire pressure warning light may notcome on even if the tire inflation pres-sure is low, or it may come on whenthe tire inflation pressure is actuallynormal.

� A compact spare tire, snow tires, ortire chains are used.

� The tire inflation pressure is excessive-ly higher than specified, or tire inflationpressure suddenly drops due to burst-ing or other causes.

� The vehicle is driven on a slipperyroad surface such as rough or frozenroads.

� The vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h(19 mph) or more than 100 km/h (62mph), and the driving duration is lessthan 5 minutes.

� The tires differ in tread pattern ormanufacturer.

� The tires are not the specified size.

� The tread wear is very different amongthe installed tires.

� Rapid acceleration/deceleration orsharp turns is continued.

� Towing a trailer.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

130


� The loading is over the limit or imbal-anced.

� Initialization was not performed correct-ly after replacing or rotating tires orwheels.

� The outside temperature is below 0�C(32�F) or above 40�C (104�F).

CAUTION

When the tire pressure warning lightcomes on, observe the following in-structions:

� Adjust the tire inflation pressure tothe specified level as soon as pos-sible.

� Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneu-vering and braking. If the vehicletires deteriorate, you could losecontrol of the steering wheel or thebrakes, causing death or serious in-jury.

Note: The tire pressure monitoringsystem on your vehicle will warn youwhen one of your tires is significantlyunder−inflated and when some com-binations of your tires are significant-ly under−inflated. However, there areother combinations of significantlyunder−inflated tires for which yourtire pressure monitoring system maynot warn you. These other combina-tions are relatively common, account-ing for approximately half theinstances in which vehicles have sig-nificantly under−inflated tires. For ex-ample, your system may not warn youwhen both tires on the same side oron the same axle of your vehicle aresignificantly under−inflated. It is par-ticularly important, therefore, for youto check the tire pressure in all ofyour tires regularly and maintainproper pressure.

TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEMRESET SWITCH

The tire pressure warning system needto be initialized in the following condi-tions:

� When the low tire pressure warninglight blinks once every three sec-onds

� After replacing or rotating tires orwheels

When initializing the system, the pres-ent tire condition is stored as a stan-dard.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

131


To initialize the system, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Park the vehicle at a safe place andapply the parking brake. Stop the en-gine.

2. Adjust the pressure of all the installedtires to the specified level. (See “Tires”on page 306 in Section 8.)

3. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

If the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on, push the reset switch for afew seconds and make sure the warn-ing light goes off.

4. Push and hold the reset switch untilthe low tire pressure warning lightblinks three times.

Initialization is completed after driving atthe speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) or overfor more than one hour. If the followingdriving conditions are satisfied, initializa-tion will be completed in about one hour.

� The vehicle speed is between 50 km/h(31 mph) and 100 km/h (62 mph).

� The roads are dry, smooth and straight.

� The number of passengers is 1 or 2(including driver).

When initializing the system, make surethe low tire pressure warning light blinksthree times. If the warning light does notblink three times, initializing will be failedand the tire pressure warning system willnot function properly.

Do not push the reset switch without ad-justing the tire inflation pressure to thespecified level. Otherwise, the low tirepressure warning light may not come oneven if the tire pressure is low, or it maycome on when the tire inflation pressureis actually normal.

If you push the reset switch while thevehicle is moving, initialization is not per-formed.

If the low tire pressure warning light doesnot blink when you push and hold thereset switch, have the low pressure warn-ing system checked at your Toyota dealer.

When the warning light blinks once everythree seconds while driving, you may beunable to reset the system. In this case,set the system again according to theabove procedure.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

132


Type A

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Pull up the lever. For better hold-ing power, first depress the brake pedaland hold it while setting the parkingbrake.To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),press the lock release button (2), and low-er (3).

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) even with your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of engineperformance, although a slight speedchange may occur when driving up ordown the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

Parking brake Cruise control


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

133


TURNING THE SYSTEM ON

To operate the cruise control, push the“ON−OFF” switch. This turns the systemon. The indicator light in the instrumentpanel shows that you can now set thevehicle at a desired cruising speed. Anoth-er push will turn the system completelyoff.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the “ON−OFF” switchoff when not using the cruise control.

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

On vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CAUTION

For manual transmission:

While driving with the cruise controlon, do not shift to neutral withoutdepressing the clutch pedal, as thismay cause engine racing or overrev-ving.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL”direction and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

c. Depressing the clutch pedal (manualtransmission).

d. Pushing “ON−OFF” switch.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-matically cancel out.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

134


If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

On vehicles with automatic transmission,even if you turn off the overdrive switchwith the cruise control on, engine brakingwill not be applied because the cruisecontrol is not cancelled. To decrease thevehicle speed, reset to a slower speedwith the cruise control lever or depressthe brake pedal. If you use the brakepedal, cruise control is cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal or clutch pedal, pushing thelever up in the “+ RES” direction will re-store the speed set prior to cancellation.

Except for two−wheel drive models with1ZZ−FE engine—However, once the ve-hicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25mph), the preset speed will not be re-sumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “ON−OFF” switchto turn the system off and then press itagain to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

135


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSCar audio systemReference 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car audio system operating hints 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 8


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

136


Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player(with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc playerwith changer

This Section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

You can turn on compact disc player byinserting compact disc.

The audio system will change to the radiomode when a compact disc is ejected dur-ing play.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM”, “FM1·2” or “DISC” if thesystem is already on but you want toswitch from one function to another.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange (on some models oftype 2) and bass levels. In fact, differentkinds of music and vocal programs usuallysound better with different mixes of treble,midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has a mast type antenna.

To remove the antenna, carefully turn itcounterclockwise.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.

ReferenceUsing your audio system——Some basics


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

137


YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. The player will playfrom track 1 through to the end of thedisc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button, wait for the load/eject status lightto turn green, then gently push the discin with the label side up. The player willplay from track 1 through to the end ofthe disc. Then it will play from track 1 ofthe next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc player. Insert onlyone compact disc into slot at atime.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

138


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

139


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The preset buttonnumber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button. (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button toeject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the following errormessages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

140


� DISC �

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”will appear on the display. This systemallows you to set twelve FM stations, twofor each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

RPT (Repeat)

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

141


SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “�” or “�” sideof the “SCAN” button. The radio will findthe next station up the station band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then scan againto the next station. To stop scanning,push “�” or “�” side of this button again.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “�” or “�” side of the“SCAN” button until you hear a beep. Theradio will tune in the next preset stationup or down the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To stop scanning, push “�” or“�” side of this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “�” or “�” sideof the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appearon the display and the player will scan allthe tracks on the disc you are listening to.To stop scanning, push “�” or “�” sideof this button again. If the player scannedall the tracks on the disc, it will stopscanning.


Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push and hold “�” or “�” side of the“SCAN” button until you hear a beep.“ ·SCAN” will appear on the display andthe player will scan the first track of thenext disc. To stop scanning, push “�” or“�” side of this button again. If the playerhas scanned all the discs, it will stopscanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

142


TEXT

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

143


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

�Type 2


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

144


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The preset buttonnumber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FMstations for each button. (The display willshow “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “�” (presetbutton 3) or “�” (preset button 4) until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

MID (on some models): Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the six followingerror messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

145


“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

� DISC �

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”will appear on the display. This systemallows you to set twelve FM stations, twofor each of the preset button.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on), then insertthe first compact disc. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will close.After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-matically open again so the next disc canbe inserted. The same process can beapplied for loading the rest of the discs.If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RDS (Radio Data System) display

The radio will automatically switch to theRDS mode to receive an RDS stationwhile turned to FM broadcasts. “RDS” willappear on the display.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

146


RPT (Repeat)

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer scanned all the tracks on the disc,it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack of the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the changer hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

147


SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDSmode.

When an RDS station transmits a textmessage, “MSG” will appear on the dis-played.

To display the text message, first pushthe “TEXT” button to change the radiostation display. Then push the “TEXT” but-ton once more to display, and the mes-sage will appear on the display.

If the entire the message is not displayed,“ ” will appear on the display. To displaythe rest of the message, push and holdthe “TEXT” button until you hear a beep.

After the entire message has been dis-played, the message will disappear.

The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed.

If no messages are received, “NOMESSAGE” will appear on the display, andthe display returns to the previous mode.

The message display will be canceled ifyou activate any function that affects thedisplay.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement(TA) feature on and off. This button isoperational only in FM mode.

By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAFSEEK” will flash on the display and theradio will start seeking any traffic programstation.

When a traffic program station is found,“TRAF” will be displayed and you will heara beep.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

148


After the traffic announcement program isover, the display returns to the previousmode.

If no traffic program station is found, “NOTRAF INFO” appears on the display, andthe display returns to the previous modeand a beep sound.

To cancel the traffic announcement, pushthis button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.

TYPE (Program Types)

When you push “�” or “�” of the “TYPE”button while receiving an RDS station, thecurrent program type will appear on thedisplay. If the system is receiving a sta-tion that is not RDS, “NO PTY” will ap-pear.

Repeat this operation within 6 seconds todisplay the program types in the followingorder:

� ROCK

� EASY LIS (Easy listening)

� CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

� R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

� INFORM (Information)

� RELIGION

� MISC (Miscellaneous)

� ALERT (Emergency message)

To seek or scan for the same type ofprogram, push the “SEEK/TRACK” or“SCAN” button while the program type isdisplayed.

If no program is found, “NOTHING” willappear on the display. The previous pro-gram information will resume.

When the system is left untouched for 6seconds, the program type display willchange to the frequency display.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio system op-erations:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

� Do not put anything other thanCompact Disc into the slot.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio system which you are listeningto. However, this does not indicatea malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Car audio system operatinghints


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

149


Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere–especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

� The player is intended for use with 12cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

150


� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

Copy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

151


NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar-ent/translucent, low quality or labeleddiscs such as those shown in the il-lustrations. The use of such discsmay damage the player or changer, orit may be impossible to eject thedisc.

Correct Wrong

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

152



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

153


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemControls 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel vents 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

154


1. “A/C” button (on some models)

2. Air flow selector

3. Fan speed selector

4. Temperature selector

5. Air intake selector

Controls�Without navigation system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

155


1. “A/C” button (on some models)

2. Air flow selector

3. Fan speed selector

4. Temperature selector

5. Air intake selector

�With navigation system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

156


Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperatu-re—to the right to warm, to the left tocool.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Turning the air flow selector to thefloor/windshield position turns on thedefogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

In this position, air intake selectormode changes to FRESH automaticallyto clean up the front view quickly. It isnot possible to return to RECIRCULATEin this position.

Vehicles with “A/C” button—

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging function with the purpose of clear-ing the front view.

In this position, air intake selectormode changes to FRESH automaticallyto clean up the front view quickly. It isnot possible to return to RECIRCULATEin this position.


Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

157


Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button (on some models)

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

158


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

Air flow selector settings

: On some models

Operating tips


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

159


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

Ventilation


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

160


Defogging

The inside of the windshield



(red zone) to heat;COLD (blue zone) to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, air in-take selector mode changes to FRESHautomatically to clean up the front viewquickly. It is not possible to return toRECIRCULATE in this position.


Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

The outside of the windshield



(red zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defrosting function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, air in-take selector mode changes to FRESHautomatically to clean up the front viewquickly. It is not possible to return toRECIRCULATE in this position.


Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

Open

Close

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe instrument panel vents. The instrumentpanel vents may be opened or closed asshown.

Instrument panel vents


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

161


You can change air flow direction by turn-ing the instrument panel vents.

The air conditioning filter informationlabel is placed inside of the glove boxas shown and indicates that a filter hasbeen installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dustfrom entering the vehicle through the airconditioning vent.

The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily inFRESH mode.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenance sched-ule. (For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “Scheduled Main-tenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.)

Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter (on some models)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

162


1. Open the glove box. Remove thescrew with a Phillips−head screw-driver and slide off the damper asshown.

2. Push in each side of the glove boxto disconnect the claws.

3. Remove the filter cover as shown inthe illustration.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

163


4. Remove the filter from the filter out-let. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When installing the filter in the filteroutlet, keep the arrow pointing up.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

164



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

183


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaBreak- in period 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three- way catalytic converters 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium- tipped spark plugs 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

184


Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak- in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive slowly with the manualtransmission in a high gear.

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

� Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix- ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5- M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

1ZZ- FE engine—Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher.

2ZZ- GE engine—Select premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher for optimumengine performance.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

Break- in period Fuel


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

185


GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid buildup of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld- Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 3 or 4 hasbeen adopted. The WWFC improves airquality by providing for better emis-sions in vehicle fleets, and customersatisfaction through better vehicle per-formance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

186


NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveab ility problems occur (poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

Two- wheel drive models50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 Imp. gal.)

Four- wheel drive models45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that liquid has leaked onto theground, it is the fuel system hasbeen damaged and it is in need ofrepair. In this case, do not restart theengine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

187


Two- wheel drive models with 1ZZ- FE en-gine

Four- wheel drive models with 1ZZ- FE en-gine

2ZZ- GE engine

The three- way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that might burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three- way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three-way catalytic converter.

� Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

Three- way catalytic converters


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

188


� Avoid racing the engine.

� Do not push- start or pull- start yourvehicle.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel systems could cause an ex-tremely high three- way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check- up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree- way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three- way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� Keep the back door and glass hatchclosed while driving. An open orunsealed back door and glasshatch, may cause exhaust gases tobe drawn into the vehicle.

If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, drive with the windowsopen and the back door closed.Have the cause immediately locatedand corrected.

Engine exhaust cautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

189


FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by highspeed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 272 in Section 7- 2.

Facts about engine oilconsumption


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

190


Your engine is fitted with iridium- tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium- tipped spark plugsand do not adjust gaps for your en-gine performance and smooth drive-ability.

The tandem master cylinder brake systemis a hydraulic system with two separatesub- systems. If either sub- system shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower- assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

ANTI- LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(with “ABS” warning light)

The anti- lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock- up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Iridium- tipped spark plugs Brake system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

191


Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti- lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti- lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti- lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on a manhole cov-er, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti- lock brake sys-tem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle begins to move. This meansthat the anti- lock brake system is in theself- check mode, and does not indicate amalfunction.

When the anti- lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

� You may hear the anti- lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

� At the end of the anti- lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti- lockbrake system: Although the anti- lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti-lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti- lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti- lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti- lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

192


� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti- lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

Type A

Type B

“ABS” warning light

Vehicles without vehicle stability controlsystem—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti-lock brake system works properly, thelight turns off after a few seconds. There-after, if the system malfunctions, the lightcomes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system does not operate,but the brake system still operates con-ventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

193






CAUTION


In this case, not only the anti- lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

Vehicles with vehicle stability controlsystem—

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti-lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if thesystem malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system andthe vehicle stability control system do notoperate, but the brake system still oper-ates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.





CAUTION


In this case, not only the anti- lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

194


DRUM- IN- DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM (with 2ZZ- GE engine)

Your vehicle has a drum- in- disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding- down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding- down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (vehicles withvehicle stability control system)

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibrations of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 107 in Sec-tion 1- 6.

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

Brake pad wear limitindicators


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

195


The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from the out-side.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

1ZZ- FE engine

2ZZ- GE engine

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber —Engine number


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

196


The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Theft prevention labels(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

197


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size— For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 201.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)— For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 200.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—For details, see “—Uniform tirequality grading” on page 202.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators— For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 280.

5. Turning direction indicator—Some vehicles are equipped withdirectional tires. For details, see“Rotating tires” on page 283.

6. Tire ply composition and mate-rials— Plies mean a layer of rub-ber- coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

Tire information——Tire symbols (standard tire)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

198


7. Radial tire or bias- ply tires— Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias- ply tire.

8. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”— A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

9. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure— For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 280.

10.Maximum cold tire inflationpressure— This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 306.

11.Summer tire or all seasontire— An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 210.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

199


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)— For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 200.

2. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”— Acompact spare tire is identified bythe phrase “TEMPORARY USEONLY” molded into its sidewall.This tire is designed for temporaryemergency use only. For details,see “Compact spare tire” on page232.

3. Tire ply composition and mate-rials— Plies mean a layer of rub-ber- coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

4. Tire size— For details, see “—Tiresize” on page 201.

5. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”— A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

—Tire symbols (compact spare tire)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

200


6. Radial tires or bias- ply tires— Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias- ply tire.

7. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure— For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 280.

8. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure— This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 306.

9. The location of the tread wearindicators— For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 280.

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

201


Type A

Type B

This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)2. Section width (in millimeters)3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)5. Wheel diameter (in inches)6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)8. Speed category (alphabet with

one letter)

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

—Tire size


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

202


1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

This information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear— The treadwear grade isa comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1- 1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

—Name of each section of tire —Uniform tire quality grading


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

203


Traction AA, A, B, C— The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

Temperature A, B, C— The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

204


Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may bereplaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these itemsare available as factory- installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mileunder that condition

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire orIntended outboard sidewall deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and itis shown on the sidewall of the tire

the sum of—the sum of—(a) curb weight;

Maximum loaded vehicle weight(a) curb weight(b) accessory weight;Maximum loaded vehicle weight (b) accessory weight(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) d ti ti i ht( ) y g(d) production options weight

—Glossary of tire terminology


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

205



Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighingover 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includingheavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specialtrim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

206



Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number ofoccupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

207


Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below.Total load capacity:

385 kg (850 Ib.)Total load capacity means com-bined weight of occupants, cargoand luggage. Tongue load is in-cluded when trailer towing.

Seating capacity:Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)Seating capacity means the maxi-mum number of occupants whoseestimated average weight is 68 kg(150 lb.) per person. Depending onthe weight of each person, the seat-ing capacity given may exceed thetotal load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupantsare within the seating capacity,do not exceed the total load ca-pacity.

Towing capacity: 680 kg (1500 Ib.)Towing capacity means the maxi-mum gross trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo weight) thatyour vehicle is able to tow.

Cargo capacity:Cargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size(weight) and the number of occu-pants. For details, see “Capacityand distribution” that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:� Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

� For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

� When the rear seatbacks are inthe upright position—To prevent cargo and l uggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartmenthigher than the seatbacks.Keep cargo and luggage low,as close to the floor as pos-sible.

Vehicle load limitsCargo and luggage——Stowage precautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

208


When the rear seatbacks arefolded down—To prevent cargo and l ugga-ge from sliding forward dur-ing braking, do not stackanything in the enlarged lug-gage compartment. Keep car-go and luggage low, as closeto the floor as possible.

� Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely suffer seri-ous bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a colli-sion.

� Do not place anything on theluggage cover. Such items maybe thrown about and possiblyinjure people in the vehicleduring sudden braking or anaccident. Secure all items in asafe place.

� Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)STEPS FOR DETERMININGCORRECT LOAD LIMIT1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXpounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

—Capacity and distribution


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

209


4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example,if the “XXX” amount equals 1400lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the available car-go and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 217.

Cargocapacity

Total loadcapacity

EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLEIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle with the totalload capacity of 385 kg (850 lb.), theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity will be as follows:385 kg – 166 kg = 219 kg.(850 lb. – 366 lb. = 484 lb.)From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:

219 kg – 176 kg = 43 kg.(484 lb. – 388 lb. = 96 lb.)As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 207.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

210


CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Determine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are highspeed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow- covered or icy roads.For driving on snow- covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.The details about how to distinguishsummer tires from all season tires aredescribed on page 197.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

� Do not use tire other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originals.

Types of tires


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

211


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the engine 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four- wheel driving tips 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 222. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

212


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion height, head restraintheight and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all the side doors and back door.Close the glass hatch.

5. Fasten seat belts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Manual transmission: Press the clutchpedal to the floor and shift the trans-mission into neutral. Hold the clutchpedal to the floor until the engine isstarted. A starter safety device will pre-vent the starter from operating if theclutch pedal is not fully depressed.

Automatic transmission: Put the se-lector lever in “P”. If you need to re-start the engine while the vehicle ismoving, put the selector lever in “N”.A starter safety device will prevent thestarter from operating if the selectorlever is in any drive position.

4. Automatic transmission only: De-press the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair- fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,crank the engine by turning the key to“START”. Release it when the enginestarts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,not in idle. For warming up, drive withsmoothly turning engine until engine cool-ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page226 in Section 4.

Before starting the engineHow to start the engine—(a) Before cranking (b) Starting the engine


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

213


NOTICE

� Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp- edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P” (automatic) or in first orreverse (manual). If necessary, blockthe wheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

Tips for driving in variousconditions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

214


� Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking, could causethe vehicle to skid or spin.

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas highspeed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare highspeed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

� If you need greater traction while driv-ing on sand, mud or snow coveredroadways, use tire chains on the frontwheels.

� Always check your brakes for effective-ness immediately after driving acrosssand, mud, or water.

� If operating in adverse conditionsfrequently, vehicle maintenance shouldbe increased. (See the separate“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Observe the following tire instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accident may oc-cur resulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� Keep your tire pressure at the prop-er level. (See “Checking tire infla-tion pressure” on page 278 in Sec-tion 7- 2.)

� Do not use tires (including snowtires) of different brands, sizes,construction or tread patterns. (See“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 280 and “Installing snow tiresand chains” on page 284 in Section7- 2.)

� Do not use tires with different treadwear. To equalize the tire wear, ro-tate tires at the appropriate interval.(See “Rotating tires” on page 283in Section 7- 2.)

� Use the manufacturer’s recom-mended wheels. Do not use wheelsof different sizes and types. (See“Replacing wheels” on page 285 inSection 7- 2.)

NOTICE

Do not attempt to go off- road in yourToyota. It is not designed for off- roaduse.

Four- wheel driving tips (four- wheel drive models)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

215


Make sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non- silicate, non- amine, non- nitrite,and non- borate coolant with long- lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith longlife hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”on page 274 in Section 7- 2 for details ofcoolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about -35�C(- 31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about -42�C(- 44�F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7- 3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 272 in Section 7- 2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—they will be pleasedto help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de- icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” (automatic) or into first or reverse(manual) and block the rear wheels. Donot use the parking brake, or snow orwater accumulated in and around theparking brake mechanism may freeze,making it hard to release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Winter driving tips


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

216


NOTICE

Do not use window scraper or deicerwhen the plastic resin moon roof isheavily coated with frost or ice. Theplastic resin moon roof is easily dam-aged.

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Your vehicle can be dinghy towed (withfour wheels on the ground) from thefront behind a motorhome.

CAUTION

Dinghy towing requires special equip-ment and accessories. Please refer toyour service outlet of the motorhomemanufacture for the recommendedequipment.

Dinghy towing(with automatic transmission)

Dinghy towing(with manual transmission)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

217


NOTICE

Dinghy towing does not eliminate thepossibility of damage to your vehicle.

DINGHY TOWING TIPS

Before dinghy towing, be sure to ob-serve the following in order to reducethe damage to your vehicle.

1. Put the shift lever in neutral.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”position. Make sure the audio is turnedoff and any item is not plugged intothe power outlet.

NOTICE

To avoid the locking of the steeringwheel, turn the ignition switch to the“ACC” position.

3. Release the parking brake.

After dinghy towing, let the engine idle formore than 3 minutes before driving thevehicle.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle from therear. This may cause serious damageto your vehicle.

Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger- carrying vehicle. Towing atrailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For yoursafety and the safety of others, you mustnot overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyotawarranties do not apply to damage ormalfunction caused by towing a trailer forcommercial purposes. Ask your localToyota dealer for further details beforetowing.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

Trailer towing


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

218


CAUTION

� The total trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo load) mustnot exceed 680 kg (1500 lb.). Ex-ceeding this weight is dangerous.

� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailerhitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

219


Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

Tongue load

Tongue load� 100 = 9 to 11%

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumof 68 kg (150 lb.). Never load thetrailer with more weight in the backthan in the front. About 60% of thetrailer load should be in the fronthalf of the trailer and the remaining40% in the rear.

HITCHES

� Use only a weight carrying hitchdesigned for the total trailer weight.Toyota does not recommend using aweight distribution (load equalizing)hitch.

� The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

� The hitch ball should have a light coatof grease.

� Toyota recommends that the trailerhitch be removed when not towing toprevent injury and/or damage by thehitch in event of a rear end collision.After removing the hitch, the installa-tion area should be sealed to prevententry of exhaust fumes and mud.

NOTICE

Do not use an axle- mounting hitch asit may cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels and/or tires.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.

CAUTION

� If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired.

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

220


� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 278 in Sec-tion 7- 2 and page 306 in Section 8 forinstructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

� Trailer lights must comply with federal,state/provincial and local regulations.See your local recreational vehicledealer or rental agency for the correcttype of wiring and relays for your trail-er. Check for correct operation of theturn signals and stop lights each timeyou hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-age your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK- IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE- TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose- up or nose- downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle- trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle- to- vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

221


� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, prevent excessive clutchslippage by keeping engine rpm lowand not racing the engine. Always startout in first gear.

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer). Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

� In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not use fifth gear (manualtransmission) or overdrive (automatictransmission).

� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 230 inSection 4.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P” (automatic)or in first or reverse (manual). Avoidparking on a slope with a trailer, butif it cannot be avoided, do so onlyafter performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into first or reverse (manual) or“P” (automatic) and turn off the engine.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

222


When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position(automatic) or the clutch pedal de-pressed (manual), start the engine.(With an automatic transmission, besure to keep the brake pedal de-pressed.)

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake (also footbrake on automatic transmission ve-hicles) and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle-trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page278 in Section 7- 2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Avoid lengthy warm- up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

� Keep the automatic transmissionoverdrive turned on when enginebraking is not required. Driving withthe overdrive off will reduce the fueleconomy. (For details, see “Automatictransmission” on page 119 in Section1- 7.)

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

223


� Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

� Avoid engine lugging or overrev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop- and- go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the clutchor brake pedal. This causes prematurewear, overheating and poor fuel econo-my.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned- up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease,brakes not adjusted, etc. alllower engine performance and contrib-ute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

224



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

225


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 247. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 248. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

226


Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct startingprocedure given in “How to start theengine” on page 212 in Section 3 and thatyou have sufficient fuel. Also, checkwhether the other keys will start theengine. If they work, your key may bebroken. Have the key checked at yourToyota dealer. If none of your keys work,there may be a malfunction in the immobi-lizer system. Call your Toyota dealer. (See“Keys” on page 12 in Section 1- 2.)

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page227 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull- or push- start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three- way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” on page 226 for further instruc-tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the key to “START”with the accelerator pedal fully depressed.Keep the key and accelerator pedal inthese positions for 15 seconds and re-lease them. Then try starting the enginewith your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-conds of cranking, release the key, waita few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

227


To avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water im-mediately. Then get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continueto apply water with a sponge orcloth while en route to the medicaloffice.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

(c) Jump starting


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

228


Dischargedbattery

Boosterbattery

Positive terminal(“+” mark)

Jumpercable Positive terminal

(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Jumper cableBoosterbattery

Negative terminal(“- ” mark)

Dischargedbattery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) cable to the negative (- ) termi-nal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or nearany part that moves when the engineis cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

229


5. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked at your Toyotadealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart your en-gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-ecked at your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 226 in thisSection.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase whenthe accelerator pedal is depressed, theremay be a problem somewhere in the elec-tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-er, if you depress the accelerator pedalmore firmly and slowly, you can drive yourvehicle at low speeds. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronicthrottle control system is corrected duringlow speed driving, the system may not berecovered until the engine is stopped andthe ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-neous pedal operation.

If your engine stalls whiledriving

If you cannot incr ease enginespeed (1ZZ- FE engine withtwo- wheel drive models)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

230


If your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”(automatic) or neutral (manual) and ap-ply the parking brake. Turn off the airconditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning and make sure the electriccooling fan is operating. If it is not,turn the ignition off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealerfor assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the en-gine is running. Fill it about half full.For the coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” on page 275 in Section 7- 2.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle overheats


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

231


1. Reduce your speed graduallywhile driving in a straight line.Move cautiously off the road to asafe place well away from the traf-fic. Avoid stopping on the centerdivider of a highway. Park on a lev-el spot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P” (auto-matic) or reverse (manual).

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of personal injury:� Follow jacking instructions.� Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the enginewhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P” (automatic) or reverse(manual). Block the wheel diag-onally opposite to the one be-ing changed if necessary.

� Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

� Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

� Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

If you have a flat tire—


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

232


NOTICE

Do not continue driving with adeflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair.

Compact spare tireThe compact spare tire is designedfor temporary emergency use only.The compact spare tire is identifiedby the distinctive wording“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” moldedinto the side wall of the tire.The compact spare tire saves spacein your luggage compartment, and itslighter weight helps to improve fueleconomy and permits easier installa-tion in case of a flat tire.

The compact spare tire can be usedmany times, if necessary. It has treadlife of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) de-pending on road conditions and yourdriving habits. When tread wear indi-cators appear on the tire, replace thetire.See also the tire information on page280 in Section 7- 2 for details on thetread wear indicators and other ser-vice information.

CAUTION

� The compact spare tire was de-signed especially for your Toy-ota. Do not use it on any othervehicle.

� Do not use more than one com-pact spare tire at the sametime.

� The pressure for the compactspare tire must be 420 kPa (4.2kgf/cm 2 or bar, 60 psi).

� Do not exceed 80 km/h (50mph) when driving with thecompact spare tire.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

233


� Replace the compact spare tirewith the standard tire as soonas possible.

� Avoid sudden a cceleration,sudden d eceleration and sharpturns with the compact sparetire.

NOTICE

Your ground clearance is re-duced when the compact sparetire is installed so avoid drivingover obstacles and drive slowlyon rough, unpaved roads andspeed bumps. Also, do not at-tempt to go through an auto-matic car wash as the vehiclemay get caught, resulting indamage.

1. Open the rear luggage storagebox and get the required toolsand spare tire.1. Jack handle2. Wheel nut wrench3. Jack4. Spare tire

To open the rear luggage storage box,see “Luggage storage boxes” on page177 in Section 1- 10.To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.

To remove the jack, unhook the tight-ening strap.To store the jack, make sure it is se-curely held by the tightening strap.

—Required tools and sparetire


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

234


To remove the spare tire:1. Loosen the nut and remove it.2. Remove the luggage storage box.3. Loosen the bolt and remove it.When storing the spare tire, put it inplace with the inner side of the wheelfacing up. Then secure the tire by re-peating the above removal steps inreverse order to prevent it from flyingforward during a collision or suddenbraking.

The compact tire storage area is de-signed only for a compact spare tire.Standard size tires cannot be storedin this storage area.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

—Blocking the wheel


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

235


3. Remove the wheel ornament.Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrenchas shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-ment by hand. Take due care inhandling the ornament to avoidunexpected personal injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one- half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may looseand the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

—Removing wheel ornament(steel wheels) —Loosening wheel nuts


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

236


5. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

Jack point guide

With side mud guards—The jack pointguides are located under the sidemud guards. They indicate the jackpoint positions.

6. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle into the jack (it is a loose fit)and turn it clockwise. As the jacktouches the vehicle and begins to lift,double- check that it is properly posi-tioned.

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

237


CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

7. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal- to- met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

—Changing wheels


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

238


8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered endinward) and tighten them as much asyou can by hand. Press back on thetire back and see if you can tightenthem more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loose and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

9. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-wise to lower the vehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench andturn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.Do not use other tools or any addition-al leverage other than your hands,such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.Make sure the wrench is securely en-gaged over the nut.Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

239


CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 103 N·m(10.5 kgf·m, 77 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

10.Restow all the tools and jack se-curely in the luggage storagebox. Then secure the flat tire inthe luggage compartment withthe tire tie- down belts and tie-down hooks as follows.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

1. Aluminum wheels—Before stow-ing the flat tire, remove the centerwheel ornament by pushing fromthe reverse side.

Be careful not to lose the wheel orna-ment.

—Stowing flat tire


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

240


Buckle

2. Put the flat tire on the rear luggagestorage box lid with the outer sideof the wheel facing up. Hook thebelt clips closest to the buckle tothe rear upper tie- down hooks.

3. Pass the belts through the centerhole of the wheel as shown above.

4. Attach the other clips of the beltsto the lower rear tie- down hooks.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

241


5. Position the tire edge against therear center end of the rear luggagestorage box lid. Then pull the endsof the belts to secure the tire se-curely.

After stowing the flat tire, check thatthe tire and belts are secured.To loosen the tire tie- down belts, see“Tie- down hooks and tire tie- downbelts” on page 178 in Section 1- 10.

11.Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 306 inSection 8. If the pressure is lower,drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 306 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire.

—After changing wheels


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

242


Steel wheels

Aluminum wheels

After repairing the flat tire, changeit with compact spare tire and rein-stall the wheel ornament as fol-lows.Steel wheels—1. Put the wheel ornament into posi-

tion.Align the cutout of the wheel orna-ment with the valve stem asshown.

2. Press hand firmly on one side ofwheel ornament and then firmlytap the other side around the edgeof wheel ornament with the heelof your hand to snap into place.

Aluminum wheels—Push the wheel ornament into thecenter hole.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the or-nament to avoid unexpected per-sonal injury.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have replaced your tiresor wheels. See “Tire pressurewarning system” on page 128 inSection 1- 7.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

243


If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

Vehicles with traction control system—Turn off the traction control system tobecome unstuck to allow the tires tospin enough to remove the vehicle fromthe obstruction. (For details, see “Trac-tion control system” on page 124 inSection 1- 7.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

(b) Using flat bed truck

—From rear

—From front

Two- wheel drive models

If your vehicle becomes stuckIf your vehicle needs to betowed—


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

244


(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—


—From rear

—From front

Four- wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 246 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

NOTICE

Four- wheel drive models—When tow-ing, be sure to tow the vehicle withall four wheels lifted. Otherwise, thedrive system could be damaged andthe vehicle could fly off the towtruck.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

245


TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

Two- wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front— Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear—

� Manual transmission:

We recommend using a towing dollyunder the front wheels. If you do notuse a towing dolly, place the ignitionkey in the “ACC” position and put thetransmission in neutral.

NOTICE

Do not tow with the key removed orin the “LOCK” position when towingfrom the rear without a towing dolly.The steering lock mechanism is notstrong enough to hold the frontwheels straight.

� Automatic transmission:

Use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatictransmission from the rear with thefront wheels on the ground, as thismay cause serious damage to thetransmission.


Four- wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Use a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.


(c) Towing with slingtype truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

246


If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to the emergency towing eyeletunder the front of the vehicle. Use ex-treme caution when towing vehicle.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard- surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelet and towing cable orchain. The eyelet and towing cable orchain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in neutral (manu-al) or “N” (automatic). The key must bein “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine run-ning).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

—Emergency towing


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

247


If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flat- bladedscrewdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number. If your vehicle is equippedwith the engine immobilizer system, thedealer will also need your master key.

Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-lizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 12 in Section 1- 2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever If you lose your keys


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

248


You can purchase a new wireless re-mote control transmitter at your Toyotadealer.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

249


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

250


Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing. Thelower edge of doors, rocker panels andframe members have drain holes whichshould not be allowed to clog with dirtas trapped water in these areas cancause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 251 for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

251


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or in thewheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splashes an ornament, be sure towash it off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damagedplastic wheel ornament. It may fly offthe wheel and cause accidents whilethe vehicle is moving.

Washing and waxing yourToyota


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

252


Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-vents), which may be toxic or causedamage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some types ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehiclesurface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re−painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

253


CAUTION

� Vehicles with side airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, resulting in seriousinjury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Cleaning the interior


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

254


Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, car au-dio, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot apply the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

255


� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

256



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

257


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 262. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

258


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day- to- day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, and trouble- free, safe, and eco-nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day-to- day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non- Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well- trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in- dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do- it- yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 263 inSection 7.

Maintenance requirements


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

259


If you are a skilled do- it- yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do- it- your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if you run the en-gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 291 in Section 7- 3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see-through reservoir when the engine is cold.See page 274 in Section 7- 2 for addition-al information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt, or insects. See page 275 inSection 7- 2 for additional information.

Battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indica-tor color. See page 288 in Section 7- 3 foradditional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 276 in Section 7- 2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 272 in Section7- 2 for additional information.

General maintenance


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

260


Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 276 in Section 7- 2 for addition-al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 188 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers

Check that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraints move up and downsmoothly and that the locks hold securelyin any latched position. For folding- downrear seatbacks, check that the latcheslock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Clutch pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the lever has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nism

Check the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

261


Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors and back door includ-ing glass hatch operate smoothly and alllatches lock securely. Make sure the en-gine hood secondary latch secures thehood from opening when the primary latchis released.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 278 in Section 7- 2for additional information.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page280 in Section 7- 2 for additional in-formation. When checking the tires,make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 283 in Section 7- 2for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip- offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat- looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal al-most touches floor; vehicle pulls to oneside when braking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

262


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On- Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when thebattery is disconnected or run down, thecodes are erased. Also, depending onyour driving habits, the codes may not becompletely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re- testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

263


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

264


1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil level dipstick

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse block

7. Battery

8. Radiator

9. Electric cooling fan

10. Condenser

11. Windshield and rear window washerfluid tank

Engine compartment overview�1ZZ−FE engine


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

265


1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil level dipstick

3. Engine coolant reservoir

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse block

7. Battery

8. Radiator

9. Electric cooling fan

10. Condenser

11. Windshield and rear window washerfluid tank

�2ZZ−GE engine


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

266


Sparefuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 268 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

Fuse locationsDo−it−yourself serviceprecautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

267


CAUTION

� When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold, power steeringfluid reservoir and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

� Remember that battery and ignitioncable carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non−silicate,non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-rate coolant with long−life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

268


� If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, or the transmissioncould be damaged.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See Section 7−2 for details about en-gine oil selection.

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL


� “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” orsimilar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-trite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID


� Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

Parts and tools


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

269


CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Fuse with same amperage rating asoriginal

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze(for winter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in“Replacing light bulbs” on page 292 inSection 7−3.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver

Front

Rear (two−wheel drive models)

Rear (four−wheel drive models)

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

Positioning the jack


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

270


� Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”(automatic) or reverse (manual).Block the wheels on the oppositeside of the jack up point if neces-sary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

271


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions for tires of four−wheel drive models 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

272


Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

1ZZ−FE engine

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

2ZZ−GE engine

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated below for reference.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):1ZZ−FE engine 1.3 (1.4, 1.1)2ZZ−GE engine 1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

273


ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy, and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE10W−30 oil may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W−30 atthe next oil change.

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

274


Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks areadded to some oil containers to helpyou select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oilquality by API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) designations such as SL. The centerportion of the label shows the SAE viscos-ity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−Conserving” shown in the lower portion,indicates that the oil has fuel−saving ca-pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is displayed on the front ofthe container.

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on thereservoir. If the level is low, add thecoolant. (For the coolant type, see“Coolant type selection” described be-low.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “LOW” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

Checking the engine coolantlevel


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

275


Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−life hy-brid organic acid technology. (Coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology isa combination of low phosphates and or-ganic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE


Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your enginecoolant system with proper usage. “ToyotaSuper Long Life Coolant” is formulatedwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology and has been specificallydesigned to avoid engine cooling systemmalfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

Checking the radiator andcondenser


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

276


To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoirbecause brake fluid can harm yourhands or eyes. If fluid gets on yourhands or in your eyes, flush the af-fected area with clean water immedi-ately. If you still feel uncomfortablewith your hands or eyes, go to thedoctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wipe it off to prevent it from dam-aging the parts or paintwork.

If coldO.K.

Close

Open

If hotO.K.

If coldadd

If hotadd

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON�II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60�C—80�C or 140�F—175�F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10�C—30�C or 50�F—85�F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

Checking brake fluid Checking power steering fluid


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

277


Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. Ifthe fluid is cold, the level should be in the“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, thefluid level should be in the “HOT” range.If the level is at the low side of eitherrange, add automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III to bring the level withinthe range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.� Keep your tire pressure at the

proper level. (See “Checkingtire inflation pressure” on page278 in this Section.)

� Do not use tires (includingsnow tires) of different brands,sizes, construction or treadpatterns. (See “Checking andreplacing tires” on page 280and “Installing snow tires andchains” on page 284 in thisSection.)

� Do not use tires with differenttread wear. To equalize the tirewear, rotate tires at the ap-propriate interval. (See “Rotat-ing tires” on page 283 in thisSection.)

� Use the manufacturer’s recom-mended wheels. Do not usewheels of different sizes andtypes. (See “Replacing wheels”on page 285 in this Section.)

Precautions for tires offour−wheel drive models


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

278


Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on page 302 and 306. Theyare also on the tire and loading infor-mation label.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:� The pressure should be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

� Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

� Take special care when addingair to the compact spare tire.The smaller tire size can gainpressure very quickly. Add com-pressed air in small quantities andcheck the pressure often until itreaches the specified pressure.

� Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.

Checking tire inflationpressure


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

279


Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure (underinfla-tion)—� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� Poor handling� Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire� Poor sealing of the tire bead� Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

280


High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—� Poor handling� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “Δ” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.Vehicles equipped withP215/50ZR17 tires: Your Toyota hasbeen fitted with specially developedtires which provide exceptional dy-namic performance under generalroad conditions. However your ridingcomfort may worsen a little and roadnoise may increase during driving.You may also notice that your tireswill wear more rapidly and tire gripperformance will be reduced on thesnowy and/or icy roads whencompared to standard tires. Be sureto have snow tires or tire chains onthe snowy and/or icy roads and drivecarefully with the speed appropriatefor road conditions.

Checking and replacing tires


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

281


NOTICE

Low profile tire likeP215/50ZR17 or P215/50R17 90Hmay have greater damage thanusual tires to its tire wheelwhen receiving impact from theroad surface. Therefore, payattention to the following.� Be sure to use with proper

tire pressure. If the tire pres-sure is low, the tire mayhave a greater damage. Fordetailed information abouttire pressure, see page 306 inSection 8.

� Avoid driving onto high,sharp−edged objects and oth-er road hazards. Failure todo so can lead to severe tiredamage.

The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep enough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be replaced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires. Also, on four−wheel drivemodels, all the tires must be thesame brand and have the sametread patterns.Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

282


For details about the side wall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 195 and 197.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.� Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.

� Four−wheel drive models:Do not use tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction ortread patterns, as this maycause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting inloss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both of the front or reartires be replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page231 for tire change procedure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be replacedwith a new one.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 128 in Section 1−6.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

283


To equalize tire wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.See “If you have a flat tire” on page231 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.

When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

CAUTION

Do not include a compact sparetire when rotating the tires. It isdesigned for temporary use only.

Initial adjustment of the tire pres-sure warning system is necessaryafter you have rotated your tires.See “Tire pressure warning sys-tem” on page 128 in Section 1−6.

Turning direction

Type A

Type B

Vehicles equipped withP215/50ZR17 tires: You have direc-tional tires, and a turning indicatormarked on the side wall. Usingtires on the wrong side of the ve-hicle will impair tire performance.

Rotating tires


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

284


WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.Also, on four−wheel drive models, allthe tires must be the same brand andhave the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use snow tires other thanthe manufacturer’s recommended si-ze, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four−wheel drive models:Do not use snow tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction or treadpatterns, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristics result-ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires, which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Installing snow tires andchains


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

285


TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size andtype.

Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chainsexcept radial cable chains or V−bar typechains.

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check local reg-ulations before installing chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to use a tire chain onthe compact spare tire, as it may re-sult in damage to the vehicle as wellas the tire.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

This must be observed on compact sparetire, too.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacing wheels


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

286


Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� Four−wheel drive models:Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types, as thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

Initial adjustment of the tire pressurewarning system is necessary after youhave replaced your wheels. See “Tirepressure warning system” on page 128in Section 1−6.

� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

287


DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7- 3


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

288


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

Terminals Ground cable

Hold- downclamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold- down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the holddown clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery c ondition——Precautions —Checking battery exterior


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

289


NOTICE

� Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“- ” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

Type A

Green DarkClear orlight yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type BCondition

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

—Checking battery c ondition Battery recharging pr ecautions


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

290


Type A

Type B

Type C

Good Blown

Good

Good

Blown

Blown

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 266 in Sec-tion 7- 1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 307 in Section 8 for the functionscontrolled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by usingthe pull- out tool. The location of the pull-out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “INV” or“P/POINT” fuse, which may be dispens-able for normal driving, and use it if itsamperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

Checking and replacing fuses


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

291


If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.—If anywasher does not work, the washer tankmay be empty. Check the washer fluidlevel on the level gauge. If the washerfluid level is at “LOW”, add washerfluid.

For vehicles sold in Canada—If anywasher does not work or the low wind-shield washer fluid level warning lightcomes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Adding washer fluid


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

292


The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Headlights (low) 9006 55 A

Headlights (high) 9005 65 B

Front fog lights 9006 55 A

Parking, frontside marker andfront turn signallights

1157NA 27/8 C

Stop/tail and rearside markerlights

7443 21/5 D

Rear turn signallights

— 21 E

Back- up lights 921 16 D

High mountedstop light

921 16 D

License platelight

— 5 D

Replacing light bulbs—


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

293


Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Interior lights — 8 D

Personal lights(on the insiderear view mirrorwithout compass)

192 4.3 D

Personal lights(on the switchpanel of theelectric moonroof)

— 10 C

A: HB4 halogen bulbsB: HB3 halogen bulbsC: Single end bulbsD: Wedge base bulbs (clear)E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb basecounterclockwise to the front of thevehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

—Headlights (low beam)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

294


3. Install a new bulb and connectorinto the mounting hole.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

1. Open the hood.

LEFT- HAND HEADLIGHT: Remove theclip and pull out and twist the aircleaner duct unit as shown.

Removing the clip

Installing the clip

—Headlights (high beam)


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

295


2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwiseto the front of the vehicle.

3. Unplug the connector.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

4. Install a new bulb and connectorinto the mounting hole.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

296


If either the left or right front fog lightbulbs burns out, contact your Toyotadealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front foglight bulbs by yourself. You may dam-age the vehicle.

—Front fog lights—Parking, front side markerand front turn signal lights

—Stop/tail, rear side marker,rear turn signal and back- uplights


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

297


a: Stop/tail and rear side marker lightb: Rear turn signal lightc: Back- up light

Remove the clips and the cover. Removing the clips

Installing the clips

—High mounted stoplight


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

298


Remove the bolts with a Phillips- headscrewdriver.

Remove the cover with a flat- bladedscrewdriver which is wrapped with acloth.

—License plate lights


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

299



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

300



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

301


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

302


Model: 1ZZ−FE and 2ZZ−GE

Type: 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.): 1ZZ−FE engine

79.0 � 91.5 (3.11 � 3.60)2ZZ−GE engine

82.0 � 85.0 (3.23 � 3.35)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):1ZZ−FE engine 1794 (109.5)2ZZ−GE engine 1796 (109.6)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length mm (in.)

Overall width mm (in.)

Overall height∗1 mm (in.)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.)

Rear tread mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) kg (lb.)

P205/55R16 89H tires P215/50ZR17P215/50R17 90H tires

4350 (171.3) 4350 (171.3)

1775 (69.9) 1775 (69.9)

1550 (61.0)

2600 (102.4) 2600 (102.4)

1515 (59.6) 1505 (59.3)

1495 (58.9)∗2

1500 (59.1)∗3 1485 (58.5)

385 (850) 385 (850)

∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: Two−wheel drive models∗3: Four−wheel drive models

1540 (60.6)∗2

1550 (61.0)∗3

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight) kg (lb.)

680 (1500) 680 (1500)

Engine


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

303


Fuel type:

1ZZ−FE engineUnleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) orhigher

2ZZ−GE engineSelect premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher for opti-mum engine performance

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., lmp. gal.):

Two−wheel drive models50 (13.2, 11.0)

Four−wheel drive models45 (11.9, 9.9)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

1ZZ−FE engineIntake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

2ZZ−GE engine (on a roller side)Intake 0.08—0.18 (0.003—0.007)Exhaust 0.22—0.32 (0.009—0.013)

Spark plug type:

1ZZ−FE engineDENSO SK16R11NGK IFR5A11

2ZZ−GE engineDENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp. qt.):

1ZZ−FE engineWith filter 3.7 (3.9, 3.3)Without filter 3.5 (3.7, 3.1)

2ZZ−GE engineWith filter 4.4 (4.8, 4.0)Without filter 4.2 (4.6, 3.8)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:API grade SL “Energy−Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

Fuel Service specifications


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

304


COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1ZZ−FE engine 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)2ZZ−GE engine 6.7 (7.0, 5.9)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical problems,only use “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality ethyleneglycol based non−silicate, non−amine,non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology.(Coolant with long−life hybrid organicacid technology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all the lightsturned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

CLUTCH

Pedal free play, mm (in.):5—15 (0.2—0.6)

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):5−speed 1.9 (2.0, 1.7)6−speed 2.3 (2.4, 2.0)

Oil type:Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 75W−90

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp. qt.):

Two−wheel drive modelsUp to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Four−wheel drive modelsUp to 2.9 (3.1, 2.6)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV”(ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid inassuring optimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATFType T−IV” may cause deterioration inshift quality, locking up of your trans-mission accompanied by vibration, andultimately damage the automatic trans-mission of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

305


TRANSFER(four−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.8 (0.8, 0.7)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below −18�C (0�F)

SAE 85W or 85W−90

REAR DIFFERENTIAL(four−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.5 (0.5, 0.4)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below −18�C (0�F)

SAE 85W or 85W−90

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

Without anti−lock brake system78 (3.07)

With anti−lock brake system76 (2.99)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when pulled withthe force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf):

5—8 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

306


Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire size Front Rear Wheel size

Two−wheel drive models

P205/55R16 89H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 � 6 1/2JJ

P215/50ZR17 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 � 7 JJ

P215/50R17 90H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 � 7 JJ

Four−wheel drive models P205/55R16 89H 240 (2.4, 35) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 � 6 1/2JJ

Compact spare tireTire size kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel sizeT135/70R16 420 (4.2, 60) 16 � 4TT135/80R16 420 (4.2, 60) 16 � 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):103 (10.5, 77)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Precautions for tires offour−wheel drive models” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 277 through 286, in Section 7−2.

Tires


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

307


Engine compartment

Instrument panel

Fuses (type A)

1. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

2. HEAD LH UPR 10 A: Left−hand head-light (high beam)

3. HEAD RH UPR 10 A: Right−handheadlight (high beam), headlight highbeam indicator light

4. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse



7. ETCS 10 A (1ZZ−FE engine with two−wheel drive models only): Electronicthrottle control system

8. AMP 30 A: Car audio system

9. MAIN 30 A: Starting system, “AM2”fuse

10. DOME 15 A: Car audio system, navi-gation system, clock, personal lights,interior lights, open door warning light,wireless remote control system

11. HORN 10 A: Horn

12. HAZARD 10 A: Emergency flashers,turn signal lights

13. EFI 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, emission control system, “EFI”fuse

14. ALT−S 5 A: Charging system

15. HEAD LH LWR 10 A: Left−hand head-light (low beam)

16. HEAD RH LWR 10 A: Right−handheadlight (low beam)

17. EFI2 15 A: (1ZZ−FE engine with two−wheel drive models only): Multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, emissioncontrol system

18. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, license platelights, instrument panel lights, instru-ment cluster lights, clock

Fuses


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

308


19. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

20. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wipers

21. AM2 15 A: Charging system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system, starting sys-tem, SRS airbag system

22. STOP 15 A: Stop lights, high mountedstoplight, anti−lock brake system, shiftlock control system, multiport fuel in-jection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system, cruise control system

23. DOOR 25 A: Power door lock system,glass hatch opener switch

24. AM1 25 A: “CIG” fuse

25. ECU−IG 10 A: Electric cooling fan,anti−lock brake system, traction controlsystem, vehicle stability control system,brake assist system, shift lock controlsystem, cruise control system

26. RR WIPER 15 A: Rear window wiper

27. A/C 10 A: Air conditioning system

28. INV 15 A: Power outlet (115 VAC)

29. P/POINT 15 A: Power outlet (12 VDC/in the rear console box)

30. ECU−B 10 A: Daytime running lightsystem

31. CIG 15 A: Power outlet (12 VDC/onthe instrument panel) or cigarette light-er, car audio system, clock, shift lockcontrol system

32. GAUGE 10 A: Gauges and meters, airconditioning system, daytime runninglight system, charging system, autoanti−glare inside rear view mirror, pow-er windows, cruise control system, rearwindow defogger, back−up lights, frontpassenger’s seat belt reminder light,emergency flasher

33. WASHER 15 A: Windshield washer,rear window washer

34. M−HTR/DEF I−UP 10 A: Engine controlsystem

Fuses (type B)

35. ABS NO.1 30 A: Anti−lock brake sys-tem, traction control system, vehiclestability control system, brake assistsystem

36. RDI FAN 40 A: Electric cooling fan

37. ABS NO.2 40 A (without vehicle sta-bility control system): Anti−lock brakesystem

ABS NO.2 50 A (with vehicle stabilitycontrol system): Anti−lock brake sys-tem, traction control system, vehiclestability control system, brake assistsystem

38. HEAD MAIN 40 A: “HEAD LH UPR”,“HEAD RH UPR”, “HEAD LH LWR” and“HEAD RH LWR” fuses

39. AIR PUMP 50 A (1ZZ−FE engine withfour−wheel drive models and 2ZZ−GEengine only): Emission control system

40. HTR 40 A: Air conditioning system

41. DEF 30 A: Rear window defogger,“M−HTR/DEF I−UP” fuse

42. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electricmoon roof

Fuses (type C)

43. ALT 100 A: “ABS NO.1”, “ABS NO.2”,“RDI FAN”, “FOG”, “HTR”, “AM1”,“POWER”, “DOOR”, “ECU−B”, “TAIL”,“STOP”, “P/POINT”, “INV” and “OBD”fuses, charging system


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

i


Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

� U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331

� CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free: 1−888−TOYOTA−8 (1−888−869−6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

© 2004 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)


Publication No. OM12892UPart No. 01999-12892Printed in Japan 01-0409-00

Quick index

� If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 107. . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle will not start 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your engine stalls while driving 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle overheats 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If you have a flat tire 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle needs to be towed 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Tips for driving during break- in period 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to start the engine 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� General maintenance 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

1ZZ- FE engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research OctaneNumber 91) or higher

2ZZ- GE engine: Premium UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 91(Research Octane Number 96) or higher

See page 184 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: Two- wheel drive models: 50 L (13.2 gal., 11.0 lmp. gal.)Four- wheel drive models: 45 L (11.9 gal., 9.9 lmp. gal.)

Engine oil: API grade SL “Energy- Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil isrecommended.

See page 273 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 277 through 286.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 306.

qU−6

C


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

ii


Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

iii


Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time toread Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receive themaximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems thisvehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual isthe most important Section for you and your family toread.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards youshould be aware of. These systems work together alongwith the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provideoccupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect ofeach system is enhanced when it is used properly andtogether with other systems. No single occupant restraintsystem can, by itself, provide you or your family with theequal level of restraint which these systems can providewhen used together. That is why it is important for you andyour family to understand the purpose and proper use ofeach of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in theevent of collision. However, the more you know aboutthese systems and how to use them properly, the greateryour chances become of surviving an accident withoutdeath or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants ofthe vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wearseat belts properly at all times. Children should always besecured in child restraint systems that are appropriate fortheir age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutesfor them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducingthe risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact ofthe head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

iv


In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy withtremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sourcesof serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag,or if an object or some part of his or her body has beenplaced between the occupant and the airbag at the time ofdeployment. This is just one example of how the instruc-tions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help en-sure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, andincrease the safety they can provide to you and your fami-ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your timeof ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist indriving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is asystem to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In acrash or a near car crash event, this device records someor all of the following information:

� Engine speed

� Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� Position of the transmission selector lever

� Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seatbelts or not

� Driver’s seat position

� Front passenger’s occupant classification

� SRS airbag deployment data


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

v


� SRS airbag system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to athird party except when:

� An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

� Officially requested by the police or other authorities

� Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

� Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

� Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safetyperformance

� Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,and only when it is deemed necessary

� Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non−Toyota organization forresearch purposes

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

vi


Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details ofthese maintenance requirements. Also included in Section6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-formation, please refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

� WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles aswell as waste produced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

� Battery posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

vii


Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing EquipmentStandard.

Installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such asmultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system, electronic throttle control system, cruisecontrol system, anti−lock brake system, traction controlsystem, vehicle stability control system, SRS airbag sys-tem and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to checkwith your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures orspecial instructions regarding installation.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

viii


Tires and loading on yourToyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and theexcess load may result in the deterioration ofsteering ability and braking ability, leading to anaccident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-cally and be sure to keep the load limits given inthis Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflationpressure and load limits, see pages 207 and 278.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

ix


Leak detection pump(two−wheel drive models)

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. Thischeck is done approximately five hours after the engine isturned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-neath the luggage compartment for several minutes. Itdoes not indicate a malfunction.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)

x



’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)


You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)


Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for COROLLA MATRIX, writ−

ten in English, may be purchased as applicable

from any Toyota dealer.

Pub. Name: 2005 COROLLA MATRIX RepairManual

Pub. No.: RM1108U1

RM1108U2

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune− up helps to preventsmall problems from growing into larger ones later on.The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenanceis required and clearly explains how to do the workyourself step− by− step.Areas covered include such things as spark plug re−placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.


’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409)


WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU � PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

� Comfortable

� Easy to use

� Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

UInformation Provided by:

Documents

SECTION 1 - Dealer eProcesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../toyota/2005-matrix.pdf · 2015-10-07 · ’05 MATRIX_U (L/O 0409) 8 2005 MATRIX from Sep. ’04 Prod. (OM12892U) Brake system